Перевод: со всех языков на английский

с английского на все языки

in+negative+constructions

Толкование Перевод

1 budi

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] huna budi

[English Word] you must

[Part of Speech] phrase

[Derived Language] Arabic

[Swahili Example] maji ukiyavuliya nguo huna budi kuyaogelea (methali)

[English Example] if you take off your clothes for water you must bathe (proverb)

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] budi

[Swahili Plural] budi

[English Word] alternative

[English Plural] alternatives

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 9/10

[Derived Language] Arabic

[Swahili Example] aliona hana budi kutamka neno lile alilomwitia mwenzake [Sul]

[English Example] she saw she had no alternative to pronouncing the word that would call her companion

[Note] usually used in negative constructions

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] budi

[Swahili Plural] budi

[English Word] choice

[English Plural] choices

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 9/10

[Derived Language] Arabic

[Note] usually used in negative constructions

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] budi

[Swahili Plural] budi

[English Word] necessity

[English Plural] necessities

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 9/10

[Derived Language] Arabic

[Note] usually used in negative constructions

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] budi

[Swahili Plural] budi

[English Word] way out

[English Plural] ways out

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 9/10

[Derived Language] Arabic

[Note] usually used in negative constructions

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] hakuna budi

[English Word] no way out

[Part of Speech] phrase

[Derived Language] Arabic

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] budi

[Swahili Plural] budi

[English Word] loophole

[English Plural] loopholes

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 9/10

[Derived Language] Arabic

[Note] usually used in negative constructions

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] budi

[Swahili Plural] budi

[English Word] evasion

[English Plural] evasions

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 9/10

[Derived Language] Arabic

[Note] usually used in negative constructions

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] budi

[Swahili Plural] budi

[English Word] escape

[English Plural] escapes

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 9/10

[Derived Language] Arabic

[Note] usually used in negative constructions

------------------------------------------------------------

Swahili-english dictionary > budi
2 alguno

adj.

at all, of any kind.

No hay dinero alguno en mi bolsillo There is no money at all in my pocket.

pron.

1 any one, a particular one, some.

2 someone, anybody, anyone, somebody.

* * *

alguno

► adjetivo

1 (afirmativo) some; (interrogativo, negativo) any

■ alguna noche voy al cine some nights I go to the cinema

■ no vino persona alguna nobody came

■ ¿ha habido alguna llamada? has anyone phoned?, have there been any phone calls?

■ el ministro no facilitó dato alguno the minister didn't provide any information

► pronombre

1 (afirmativo) someone, somebody; (interrogativo, negativo) anybody

■ que venga alguno que sepa francés get someone who speaks French

\

FRASEOLOGÍA

alguno que otro some, a few

* * *
1. (f. - alguna)
pron.

someone, somebody

- alguno que otro
- algunos
- algunas 2. (f. - alguna)
adj.

1) some, any

2) not any, not at all (in negative sentences)

•

- algunas veces

* * *
alguno, -a
1. ADJ
( antes de sm sing algún)
1) [antes de s] [en oraciones afirmativas] some; [en oraciones interrogativas, condicionales] any

algún día lo comprenderás — some day you'll understand

tuvimos algunas dificultades — we had a few o some difficulties

llámame si tienes algún problema — call me if you have any problems

¿conoces algún hotel barato? — do you know a cheap hotel?

hubo alguna que otra nube — there were one or two clouds, there was the odd cloud

objetos de alguna importancia — objects of some importance

• en alguna parte — somewhere

• alguna vez — [en oraciones afirmativas] at some point; [en oraciones interrogativas, condicionales] ever

todos lo hemos hecho alguna vez — we've all done it at one time or another o at some point

alguna vez le he oído hablar de ella — I have heard him mention her sometimes

¿has estado alguna vez en Nueva York? — have you ever been to New York?

2) [después de s]

no tiene talento alguno — he has no talent at all

nos atacaron sin motivo alguno — they attacked us for no reason at all

• sin interés alguno — without the slightest interest

• sin valor alguno — completely worthless
duda
3) pl algunos (=varios) several

salvaron algunos cientos de vidas — they saved several hundred lives

2. PRON

1) (=objeto) one

estará en alguno de esos cajones — it must be in one of those drawers

de entre tantas camisas, seguro que alguna te gustará — out of all these shirts, there's bound to be one that you like

• alguno que otro — one or two

2) (=persona) someone, somebody

siempre hay alguno que protesta — there is always one o someone o somebody who complains

• alguno de ellos — one of them

3) pl algunos (=cosas) some, some of them; (=personas) some, some of us/you etc

vinieron algunos, pero no todos — some of them came, but not all

algunos no se han enterado todavía — some (people) haven't found out yet
ALGUNO, ALGO "Some" y "any" en oraciones afirmativas e interrogativas Fras es afirmativas ► En frases afirmativas debe usarse some o las formas compuestas de some: He leído algunos artículos interesantes sobre el tema I have read some interesting articles on the subject Algunos no están de acuerdo Some people disagree He comprado algo para ti I've bought something for you Fras es interrogativas ► En frases interrogativas que expresan algún tipo de ofrecimiento o petición y cuya respuesta se espera que sea positiva, también debe emplearse la forma some {etc}: Tienes muchos libros. ¿Me dejas alguno? You've got lots of books. Can I borrow some? ► En el resto de las frases interrogativas, empléese any o las formas compuestas de any: ¿Se te ocurre alguna otra idea? Do you have any other ideas? ¿Hay algún sitio donde podamos escondernos? Is there anywhere we can hide? Fras es condicionales ► La construcción si + ((verbo)) + algo o algún/ alguna {etc} se traduce al inglés por if + ((sujeto)) + ((verbo)) + any {o} some, {etc}: Si necesitas algo, dímelo If you need anything, let me know Si quiere algunas cintas, no deje de pedirlas If you would like some tapes, don't hesitate to ask Hay que tener en cuenta que some se utiliza cuando tenemos más certeza de que la condición se vaya a cumplir. Para otros usos y ejemplos ver algo, alguno see NINGUNO
* * *
I
- na adjetivo

1) (delante del n)

a) ( indicando uno indeterminado) some

algún día — some o one day

en algún lugar — somewhere

b) (en frases interrogativas, condicionales, etc) any

¿tocas algún instrumento? — do you play any instruments?

si tienes algún problema — if there's any problem, if you have any problems

¿te dio algún recado para mí? — did she give you a message for me?

c) ( indicando cantidad indeterminada)

esto tiene alguna importancia — this is of some importance

hace algunos años — some years ago o a few years ago

me quedan tres tazas y algún plato — I have three cups and one or two plates

algún or alguno que otro/alguna que otra: escribió algún que otro artículo he wrote one or two articles; algún or alguno que otro lujo the odd luxury; he ido alguna que otra vez I've been once or twice; alguna que otra vez vamos al cine — we go to the cinema now and then

2) (detrás del n) ( con valor negativo)

esto no lo afectará en modo alguno — this won't affect it in the slightest o at all
II
- na pronombre

a) (cosa, persona indeterminada) one

alguno de nosotros — one of us

siempre hay alguno que no está conforme — there's always someone who doesn't agree

en alguna de esas revistas — in one of those magazines

b) (en frases interrogativas, condicionales, etc)

buscaba una guía ¿tiene alguna? — I was looking for a guide, do you have one o any?

si tuviera alguno — if I had one

c) ( una cantidad indeterminada - de personas) some people; (- de cosas) some

algunos creen que fue así — some (people) believe that was the case

he visto alguna or algunas — I've seen some

* * *

= one or other, some.

Ex. The array of data bases available through one or other of the online hosts is rapidly expanding.

Ex. The banning of The Times newspapers by some local authorities has been a case in question.

----

* alguna que otra vez = from time to time, every once in a while, occasional, every now and then, every now and again.

* algunas personas = some people.

* algunas veces = sometimes, from time to time, occasionally.

* alguna vez = ever, on any one occasion.

* algún día = one day.

* algunos = a few, some people.

* algunos años más tarde = some years on.

* algunos lo aman, otros lo odian = love it or loathe it.

* algunos otros + Nombre = various other + Nombre.

* algún tiempo = awhile.

* algún tipo de = some, some sort of.

* algún tipo de + Nombre = one kind of + Nombre + or another.

* a partir de ahora y durante + Cuantificador + algunos años = for + Cuantificador + years to come.

* de alguna manera = some way.

* de alguna otra forma = in any other way.

* de algún modo = some way.

* de algún tiempo a esta parte = for some time now.

* desde hace algún tiempo = for days.

* durante algunos años = over a period of years.

* durante algún tiempo = for days.

* en alguna ocasión = on any one occasion.

* en algún lugar = at some point.

* en algún momento = at some point, at one time or another.

* en algunos casos = in some cases.

* en algunos grupos = in some quarters.

* en algunos grupos de la población = in some quarters.

* en algunos sectores = in some quarters.

* en algunos sectores de la población = in some quarters.

* en el transcurso de algunos años = over a period of years.

* estar tramando alguna barrabasada = be up to no good, get up to + no good.

* hace algún tiempo = a while back, some while ago, sometime back.

* para alguna gente = to some people.

* para algunas personas = to some people.

* para alguno = to some.

* por decirlo de alguna manera = so to speak.

* por decirlo de algún modo = in a manner of speaking, so to speak.

* por mencionar sólo algunos = to mention only a few.

* si alguna vez lo fue = if it ever was.

* sin causa alguna = for no reason, for no specific reason, for no particular reason, for no good reason.

* sin coste alguno = without cost, without charge, free of charge, free of cost, cost free, for free, at no charge, at no cost.

* sin costo adicional alguno = at no extra charge.

* sin fundamento alguno = without any basis.

* sin razón alguna = for no reason, for no specific reason, for no particular reason, for no good reason.

* tener alguna posibilidad = have + a fighting chance.

* tener alguna posibilidad de triunfar = have + a fighting chance.

* ya hace algún tiempo = for quite some time.

* * *
I
- na adjetivo

1) (delante del n)

a) ( indicando uno indeterminado) some

algún día — some o one day

en algún lugar — somewhere

b) (en frases interrogativas, condicionales, etc) any

¿tocas algún instrumento? — do you play any instruments?

si tienes algún problema — if there's any problem, if you have any problems

¿te dio algún recado para mí? — did she give you a message for me?

c) ( indicando cantidad indeterminada)

esto tiene alguna importancia — this is of some importance

hace algunos años — some years ago o a few years ago

me quedan tres tazas y algún plato — I have three cups and one or two plates

algún or alguno que otro/alguna que otra: escribió algún que otro artículo he wrote one or two articles; algún or alguno que otro lujo the odd luxury; he ido alguna que otra vez I've been once or twice; alguna que otra vez vamos al cine — we go to the cinema now and then

2) (detrás del n) ( con valor negativo)

esto no lo afectará en modo alguno — this won't affect it in the slightest o at all
II
- na pronombre

a) (cosa, persona indeterminada) one

alguno de nosotros — one of us

siempre hay alguno que no está conforme — there's always someone who doesn't agree

en alguna de esas revistas — in one of those magazines

b) (en frases interrogativas, condicionales, etc)

buscaba una guía ¿tiene alguna? — I was looking for a guide, do you have one o any?

si tuviera alguno — if I had one

c) ( una cantidad indeterminada - de personas) some people; (- de cosas) some

algunos creen que fue así — some (people) believe that was the case

he visto alguna or algunas — I've seen some

* * *

= one or other, some.

Ex: The array of data bases available through one or other of the online hosts is rapidly expanding.

Ex: The banning of The Times newspapers by some local authorities has been a case in question.

* alguna que otra vez = from time to time, every once in a while, occasional, every now and then, every now and again.

* algunas personas = some people.

* algunas veces = sometimes, from time to time, occasionally.

* alguna vez = ever, on any one occasion.

* algún día = one day.

* algunos = a few, some people.

* algunos años más tarde = some years on.

* algunos lo aman, otros lo odian = love it or loathe it.

* algunos otros + Nombre = various other + Nombre.

* algún tiempo = awhile.

* algún tipo de = some, some sort of.

* algún tipo de + Nombre = one kind of + Nombre + or another.

* a partir de ahora y durante + Cuantificador + algunos años = for + Cuantificador + years to come.

* de alguna manera = some way.

* de alguna otra forma = in any other way.

* de algún modo = some way.

* de algún tiempo a esta parte = for some time now.

* desde hace algún tiempo = for days.

* durante algunos años = over a period of years.

* durante algún tiempo = for days.

* en alguna ocasión = on any one occasion.

* en algún lugar = at some point.

* en algún momento = at some point, at one time or another.

* en algunos casos = in some cases.

* en algunos grupos = in some quarters.

* en algunos grupos de la población = in some quarters.

* en algunos sectores = in some quarters.

* en algunos sectores de la población = in some quarters.

* en el transcurso de algunos años = over a period of years.

* estar tramando alguna barrabasada = be up to no good, get up to + no good.

* hace algún tiempo = a while back, some while ago, sometime back.

* para alguna gente = to some people.

* para algunas personas = to some people.

* para alguno = to some.

* por decirlo de alguna manera = so to speak.

* por decirlo de algún modo = in a manner of speaking, so to speak.

* por mencionar sólo algunos = to mention only a few.

* si alguna vez lo fue = if it ever was.

* sin causa alguna = for no reason, for no specific reason, for no particular reason, for no good reason.

* sin coste alguno = without cost, without charge, free of charge, free of cost, cost free, for free, at no charge, at no cost.

* sin costo adicional alguno = at no extra charge.

* sin fundamento alguno = without any basis.

* sin razón alguna = for no reason, for no specific reason, for no particular reason, for no good reason.

* tener alguna posibilidad = have + a fighting chance.

* tener alguna posibilidad de triunfar = have + a fighting chance.

* ya hace algún tiempo = for quite some time.

* * *

alguno¹ -na

adjective

[ Grammar notes (Spanish) ]

A ( delante del n)

1 (indicando uno indeterminado) some

siempre surge algún contratiempo something o some problem always crops up

algún día some o one day

en algún lugar seguro somewhere safe

2 (en frases interrogativas, condicionales, etc) any

¿tocas algún instrumento? do you play an instrument o any instruments?

¿tiene alguna falta? are there any mistakes?

¿te dio algún recado para mí? did she give you a message for me?

si tienes algún problema me lo dices if there's any problem o if you have any problems o if you have a problem, let me know

3

(indicando una cantidad indeterminada): esto tiene alguna importancia this is of some importance

hace algunos años some years ago o a few years ago

sólo me quedan tres tazas y algún plato I only have three cups and a plate or two left

fuera de algún artículo de crítica no ha escrito casi nada apart from the odd review o apart from one or two reviews he has hardly written anything

algún or alguno que otro/alguna que otra: me gustó alguna que otra de sus acuarelas I liked a few o one or two of her watercolors

algún or alguno que otro lujo the odd luxury

alguna que otra vez once or twice, on the odd occasion

B ( detrás del n)

(con valor negativo): esto no lo afectará en modo alguno this won't affect it in the slightest o at all

alguno² -na [ Grammar notes (Spanish) ]

pronoun

1 (una cosa indeterminada) one

(una persona indeterminada): no hay semana en que alguno de ellos no me dé un disgusto not a week passes without one of them upsetting me

siempre hay alguno que no está conforme there's always someone who doesn't agree

fue en alguna de esas revistas que lo leí I read it in one of those magazines

2

(en frases interrogativas, condicionales, etc): buscaba una guía ilustrada ¿tiene alguna? I was looking for an illustrated guide, do you have one o any?

si tuviera alguno te lo prestaría if I had one I'd lend it to you

3 (una cantidad indeterminada — de personas) some (people); (— de cosas) some

algunos creen que fue así some (people) believe that was the case

para alguno, es lo más importante for some, it's the most important thing

he visto alguna or algunas I've seen some

* * *

alguno 1
◊ -na adjetivo

1 ( delante del n)
a) ( indicando uno indeterminado) some;

◊ algún día some o one day;

en algún lugar somewhere
b) (en frases interrogativas, condicionales, etc) any;

◊ ¿tocas algún instrumento? do you play any instruments?;

si tienes algún problema if there's any problem, if you have any problems
c) ( indicando cantidad indeterminada):

◊ esto tiene alguna importancia this is of some importance;

hace algunos años some years ago, a few years ago;
me quedan tres tazas y algún plato I have three cups and one or two plates;
escribió algún que otro artículo he wrote one or two articles
2 ( detrás del n) ( con valor negativo):
◊ esto no lo afectará en modo alguno this won't affect it in the slightest o at all

alguno 2
◊ -na pronombre

a) (cosa, persona indeterminada) one;

◊ alguno de nosotros one of us;

siempre hay alguno que no está conforme there's always someone who doesn't agree
b) (en frases interrogativas, condicionales, etc):

◊ buscaba una guía ¿tiene alguna? I was looking for a guide, do you have one o any?;

si tuviera alguno if I had one
c) ( una cantidad indeterminada — de personas) some (people);

(— de cosas) some;
◊ algunos creen que fue así some (people) believe that was the case;

he visto algunas I've seen some;
he tenido alguno que otro I've had one or two
alguno,-a
I adjetivo
1 (afirmativo) some: algunos críticos elogiaron la obra, some critics praised the work
algunas veces me río sin motivo, some times I laugh for no reason
alguna que otra vez, now and then
2 (interrogativo) any: ¿tienes alguna cita para mañana?, have you any appointments for tomorrow?
3 (negativo) not at all: en este crimen no hay móvil alguno, there's no motive at all for this crime
II pron indef
1 someone, somebody
alguno que otro, someone or other 2 algunos,-as, some (people)
' alguno' also found in these entries:
Spanish:
algún
- alguna
- inconveniente
- vínculo
- compromiso
English:
aimlessly
- any
- anybody
- care
- some
- either
- odd

* * *

alguno, -a algún is used instead of alguno before masculine singular nouns (e.g. algún día some day).

♦ adj

1. [indeterminado] some;
[en frases interrogativas] any;
¿tienes algún libro? do you have any books?;

¿tiene algún otro color? do you have any other colours?;

algún día some o one day;

en algún lugar somewhere;

tiene que estar en algún lugar it must be somewhere or other;

compró algunas cosas he bought a few things;

ha surgido algún (que otro) problema the odd problem has come up;

si tuvieras alguna duda me lo dices should you have any queries, let me know

2. [en frases negativas] any;

no tiene importancia alguna it's of no importance whatsoever;

no tengo interés alguno (en hacerlo) I'm not in the least (bit) interested (in doing it);

en modo alguno in no way;

no vamos a permitir que este contratiempo nos afecte en modo alguno we're not going to allow this setback to affect us in any way

♦ pron

1. [persona] someone, somebody;

* * *

alguno

I adj

1 en frases afirmativas some;

alguno que otro de sus libros a few of his books;

alguno que otro jueves occasionally on a Thursday;

fumo alguno que otro cigarrillo de vez en cuando I smoke the odd cigarette, I have a cigarette from time to time;

de modo alguno in the slightest, at all;

de alguna manera somehow;

en alguna parte somewhere

2 en frases negativas, interrogativas o condicionales any;

no la influyó de modo alguno it didn’t influence her in any way;

si alguna vez … if at any time …

II pron: persona someone, somebody;

algunos opinan que some people think that;

alguno se podrá usar objeto we’ll be able to use some of them;

si alguno de vosotros/aquéllos … if one of you/them …

* * *

alguno, -na adj, (algún before masculine singular nouns)

1) : some, any

algún día: someday, one day

2) (in negative constructions) : not any, not at all

no tengo noticia alguna: I have no news at all

3)

algunas veces : sometimes

alguno, -na pron

1) : one, someone, somebody

alguno de ellos: one of them

2) algunos, -nas pron pl

: some, a few

algunos quieren trabajar: some want to work

* * *

alguno¹ adj

1. (en frases afirmativas) some

algunos chicos llegaron tarde some boys were late

2. (en frases interrogativas) any

¿conoces algún restaurante barato? do you know any cheap restaurants?

3. (en frase negativas) no / not... any

no hace daño alguno it doesn't hurt at all

sin éxito alguno without any success at all

sin decir palabra alguna without saying a single word

alguna cosa something

algún día some day

algunas veces sometimes

alguna vez ever

¿has estado alguna vez en Santander? have you ever been to Santander?

en algún sitio somewhere

alguno² pron

1. (singular) one

alguno de mis amigos one of my friends

seguro que alguno de vosotros lo conoce surely one of you must know him

2. (plural) some

algunos se fueron a casa some of them went home

Spanish-English dictionary > alguno
3 siquiera

adv.

1 at least (por lo menos).

dime siquiera tu nombre (you could) at least tell me your name

ni (tan) siquiera not even

ni (tan) siquiera me hablaron they didn't even speak to me

2 even.

No quiere siquiera su medicina Shoe doesn't want even her medicine.

conj.

1 even if (aunque).

ven siquiera por pocos días do come, even if it's only for a few days

2 although.

* * *

siquiera

► conjunción

1 (adversativa) even though, even if

■ quisiera hablar contigo, siquiera fuera un momento I would like to speak to you, even if it's only for a moment

2 (distributiva) whether

► adverbio

1 (por lo menos) at least

■ dame siquiera la mitad give me at least half of it

\

FRASEOLOGÍA

ni siquiera not even

■ ni siquiera recuerda su nombre he can't even remember his name

* * *

1. ADV

1) (=al menos) at least

una vez siquiera — once at least, just once

deja siquiera trabajar a los demás — at least let the others work

dame un abrazo siquiera — at least give me a hug

siquiera come un poquito — at least eat a bit

2) [en frases negativas]

ni siquiera me dio las gracias — he didn't even say thank you, he didn't so much as say thank you

ni me miró siquiera, ni siquiera me miró — she didn't even look at me

ni él siquiera vino — not even he came

2. CONJ

1) (=aunque) even if, even though

ven siquiera sea por pocos días — do come even if it's only for a few days

2)

siquiera venga, siquiera no venga — whether he comes or not

* * *
I
adverbio

1) ( por lo menos) at least

dile siquiera adiós — at least say goodbye to her

si (tan) siquiera me hubiera avisado...! — if only you'd warned me...!

dale (tan) siquiera unos centavos — give him something, even if it's only a few cents

2) ( en frases negativas) even

ni siquiera nos saludó — he didn't even say hello to us
II
conjunción

siquiera + subj — even if

que descanse siquiera sea una hora — let him rest even if it's only for an hour

* * *

----

* ni siquiera una vez = not once (did).

* * *
I
adverbio

1) ( por lo menos) at least

dile siquiera adiós — at least say goodbye to her

si (tan) siquiera me hubiera avisado...! — if only you'd warned me...!

dale (tan) siquiera unos centavos — give him something, even if it's only a few cents

2) ( en frases negativas) even

ni siquiera nos saludó — he didn't even say hello to us
II
conjunción

siquiera + subj — even if

que descanse siquiera sea una hora — let him rest even if it's only for an hour

* * *

* ni siquiera una vez = not once (did).

* * *

siquiera¹

adverb

A (por lo menos) at least

dile siquiera adiós at least say goodbye to her

¡si (tan) siquiera me hubiera avisado …! if only you'd warned me …!

dale (tan) siquiera unos centavos at least give him a few cents, give him something, even if it's only a few cents

B

(en frases negativas): sin saber siquiera quién era without even knowing who I was

ni siquiera nos saludó or no nos saludó siquiera he didn't even say hello to us

siquiera²

conjunction

siquiera + SUBJ even if

que descanse siquiera sea una hora let him rest even if it's only for an hour

* * *

siquiera adverbio
1 ( por lo menos) at least;
◊ dile siquiera adiós at least say goodbye to her;

¡si (tan) siquiera me hubiera avisado …! if only you'd warned me …!
2 ( en frases negativas) even;
◊ ni siquiera nos saludó he didn't even say hello to us

siquiera
I adverbio
1 (al menos) at least
2 (con negativas) even: no me saludó siquiera, she didn't even greet me
II conj frml (aunque): hazlo siquiera sea por contentarla, do it, if only to please her
' siquiera' also found in these entries:
Spanish:
adiós
- ni
- tan
- delicadeza
- gentileza
English:
beneath
- decency
- even
- pass by
- pause
- by
- summon

* * *

siquiera

♦ conj
[aunque] even if;
ven siquiera por pocos días do come, even if it's only for a few days

♦ adv
[por lo menos] at least;
dime siquiera tu nombre (you could) at least tell me your name;

no tiene siquiera dónde dormir he doesn't even have a place to sleep;

ni (tan) siquiera not even;

no me permiten ni (tan) siquiera fumar they don't even let me smoke;

ni (tan) siquiera me hablaron they didn't even speak to me;

¿te saludó? – ni (tan) siquiera eso did she say hello to you? – no, not even that;

no quiso ni (tan) siquiera saludarlo she would not so much as say hello to him

* * *

siquiera

I adv

:

ni siquiera not even;

siquiera bebe algo L.Am. at least have a drink

II conj even

* * *

siquiera adv

1) : at least

dame siquiera un poquito: at least give me a little bit

2) (in negative constructions) : not even

ni siquiera nos saludaron: they didn't even say hello to us

* * *

siquiera adv (tan solo) even

ni siquiera se despidió he didn't even say goodbye

Spanish-English dictionary > siquiera
4 cam

interest, attention

* * *

interest

* * *

interest, attention (usually only in negative constructions)

http://www.balifolder.com

Indonesia-Inggris kamus > cam
5 cam

1. interest, attention k.r(us. only in negative constructions). 2. see KECAM.

Malay-English dictionary > cam
6 ua-

negative verb not do, not be. If a verb is to be negated, ua coming before the verb receives any pronominal endings and presumably also any endings for plurality or duality, -r or -t, whereas the uninflected tense-stem of the verb follows: With the ending -n for I, one can thus have constructions like uan carë *I do not aorist, uan carnë *I did not past, uan cára *I am not doing present, uan caruva *I shall not do future. The verb ua- can itself be fully conjugated: \#ua aorist or present?, únë past, úva future, \#uië perfect the aorist and perfect are attested only with the ending -n I. In archaic Quenya these tense-forms could be combined with an uninflected aorist stem, e.g. future *úvan carë = later Quenya uan caruva, I shall not do. In later Quenya, only the forms ua present or aorist and occasionally the past tense form \#únë were used in normal prose únen *I did not, was not. PE17:144; compare FS for úva as a future-tense negative verb will not

Quettaparma Quenyallo (Quenya-English) > ua-
7 εἰ

εἰ, [dialect] Att.-[dialect] Ion. and Arc. (for εἰκ, v. infr. 11 ad init.), = [dialect] Dor. and [dialect] Aeol. αἰ, αἰκ (q. v.), Cypr.

A ἤ Inscr.Cypr.135.10
H., both εἰ and αἰ in [dialect] Ep.:— Particle used interjectionally with imper. and to express a wish, but usu. either in conditions, if, or in indirect questions, whether. In the former use its regular negative is μή; in the latter, οὐ.

A INTERJECTIONALLY, in Hom., come now! c. imper., εἰ δὲ.. ἄκουσον Il.9.262
; εἰ δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ φευγόντων ib.46; most freq. with ἄγε (q. v.), 1.302, al.

2 in wishes, c. opt., ἀλλ' εἴ τις.. καλέσειεν 10.111
, cf. 24.74; so later, εἴ μοι ξυνείη μοῖρα S.OT 863
(lyr.); εἴ μοι γένοιτο φθόγγος ἐν βραχίοσιν E.Hec. 836
: more freq. folld. by γάρ, αἲ γὰρ δὴ οὕτως εἴη Il.4.189
, al.; εἰ γὰρ γενοίμην ἀντὶ σοῦ νεκρός E.Hipp. 1410
; εἰ γὰρ γένοιτο X.Cyr.6.1.38
; εἰ γὰρ ἐν τούτῳ εἴη Pl.Prt. 310d
; of unattained wishes, in Hom. only c. opt., εἰ γὰρ ἐγὼν.. Διὸς πάϊς αἰγιόχοιο εἴην Il.13.825
; Ζεῦ πάτερ, αἰ γὰρ ἐμὸς πόσις εἴη Alcm.29
; later with past tenses of ind., εἰ γάρ μ' ὑπὸ γῆν.. ἧκεν A.Pr. 152
(anap.); εἰ γὰρ τοσαύτην δύναμιν εἶχον ὥστε .. E.Alc. 1072: twice in Od. c. inf. (cf. the use of inf. in commands), αἰ γὰρ τοῖος ἐὼν.. ἐμὸς γαμβρὸς καλέεσθαι 7.311
, cf. 24.376.

b εἴθε, [dialect] Ep. αἴθε, is freq. used in wishes in the above constructions, εἴθε οἱ αὐτῷ Ζεὺς ἀγαθὸν τελέσειεν 2.33
; εἴθ' ὣς ἡβώοιμι Il.7.157
; ἰὼ γᾶ, εἴθ' ἔμ' ἐδέξω A.Ag. 1537
(lyr.); εἴθε σοι, ὦ Περίκλεις, τότε συνεγενόμην X.Mem.1.2.46
: later c. inf., γαίης χθαμαλωτέρη εἴθε.. κεῖσθαι AP9.284
(Crin.).

c εἰ γάρ, εἴθε are also used with ὤφελον ([dialect] Ep. ὤφελλον), of past unattained wishes, αἴθ' ὤφελλες στρατοῦ ἄλλου σημαίνειν Il.14.84
; εἰ γὰρ ὤφελον [κατιδεῖν] Pl.R. 432c.

d folld. by a clause expressing a consequence of the fulfilment of the wish, αἰ γὰρ τοῦτο.. ἔπος τετελεσμένον εἴη· τῷ κε τάχα γνοίης .. Od. 15.536, cf. 17.496, al.; sts. hard to distinguish from εἰ in conditions (which may be derived from this use), εἴ μοί τι πίθοιο, τό κεν πολὺ κέρδιον εἴη Il.7.28
.

B IN CONDITIONS, if:

I with INDIC.,

1 with all tenses (for [tense] fut., v. infr. 2), to state a condition, with nothing implied as to its fulfilment, εἰ δ' οὕτω τοῦτ' ἐστίν, ἐμοὶ μέλλει φίλον εἶναι but if this is so, it will be.., Il.1.564: any form of the Verb may stand in apodosi, εἰ θεοί τι δρῶσιν αἰσχρόν, οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοί E.Fr.292.7
; εἰ δοκεῖ, πλέωμεν S.Ph. 526
; εἰ Φαῖδρον ἀγνοῶ, καὶ ἐμαυτοῦ ἐπιλέλησμαι Pl.Phdr. 228a
; κάκιστ' ἀπολοίμην, Ξανθίαν εἰ μὴ φιλῶ Ar.Ra. 579
, cf. Od.17.475; εἰ θεοῦ ἦν, οὐκ ἦν αἰσχροκερδής· εἰ δ' αἰσχροκερδής, οὐκ ἦν θεοῦ Pl.R. 408c
; εἰ ταῦτα λέγων διαφθείρω τοὺς νέους, ταῦτ' ἂν εἴη βλαβερά Id.Ap. 30b
, cf. 25b; εἰ οὗτοι ὀρθῶς ἀπέστησαν, ὑμεῖς ἂν οὐ χρεὼν ἄρχοιτε if these were right in their revolt, (it would follow that) you rule when you have no right, Th.3.40.

b to express a general condition, if ever, whenever, sts. with [tense] pres., εἴ τις δύο ἢ καὶ πλείους τις ἡμέρας λογίζεται, μάταιός ἐστιν S.Tr. 943
: with [tense] impf., εἴ τίς τι ἠρώτα ἀπεκρίνοντο Th.7.10
: rarely with [tense] aor., D.S.31.26.1, S.E.P.1.84; cf. 111.2.

2 with [tense] fut. (much less freq. than ἐάν c. subj.), either to express a future supposition emphatically, εἰ φθάσομεν τοὺς πολεμίους κατακαίνοντες οὐδεὶς ἡμῶν ἀποθανεῖται X.Cyr.7.1.19
; εἰ μὴ βοηθήσετε οὐ περιέσται τἀκεῖ Th.6.91
; εἰ αὕτη ἡ πόλις ληφθήσεται, ἔχεται ἡ πᾶσα Σικελία ibid.; in threats or warnings, εἰ μὴ καθέξεις γλῶσσαν ἔσται σοι κακά E.Fr.5
; εἰ τιμωρήσεις Πατρόκλῳ, αὐτὸς ἀποθανῇ Pl.Ap. 28c
, cf. D.28.21: or,

b to express a present intention or expectation, αἶρε πλῆκτρον εἰ μαχεῖ if you mean to fight, Ar.Av. 759; ἐγὼ μὲν οὐκ ἀνήρ.. εἰ ταῦτ' ἀνατεὶ τῇδε κείσεται κράτη S.Ant. 485
, cf. Il.1.61, E.Hec. 863.

3 with historical tenses, implying that the condition is or was unfulfilled.

a with [tense] impf., referring to present time or to continued or repeated action in past time (in Hom. always the latter, Il.24.715, al.): ταῦτα οὐκ ἂν ἐδύναντο ποιεῖν, εἰ μὴ διαίτῃ μετρίᾳ ἐχρῶντο they would not be able to do this (as they do), if they did not live an abstemious life, X.Cyr.1.2.16, cf. Pl.R. 489b; οὐκ ἂν νήσων ἐκράτει, εἰ μή τι καὶ ναυτικὸν εἶχεν he ([place name] Agamemnon) would not have been master of islands, if he had not had also some naval force, Th.1.9; αἰ δ' ἦχες ἔσλων ἴμερον ἢ κάλων.. αἴδως κεν.. ἦχεν Sapph.28
; εἰ ἦσαν ἄνδρες ἀγαθοὶ.. οὐκ ἄν ποτε ταῦτα ἔπασχον if they had been good men, they would never have suffered as they did, Pl.Grg. 516e, cf. X.Mem.1.1.5; εἰ γὰρ ἐγὼ τάδε ᾔδἐ.. οὐκ ἂν ὑπεξέφυγε if I had known this.., Il.8.366.

b with [tense] aor. referring to past time, εἰ μὴ ἔφυσε θεὸς μέλι.. ἔφασκον γλύσσονα σῦκα πέλεσθαι Xenoph.38
; εἰ μὴ ὑμεῖς ἤλθετε, ἐπορευόμεθα ἂν ἐπὶ βασιλέα had you not come, we should be on our way.., X.An.2.1.4; καὶ ἴσως ἂν ἀπέθανον, εἰ μὴ ἡ ἀρχὴ διὰ ταχέων κατελύθη Pl.Ap. 32d
, cf. Il.5.680, Od.4.364, D.4.5, 27.63: with [tense] plpf. in apodosi, εἰ τριάκοντα μόναι μετέπεσον τῶν ψήφων, ἀπεπεφεύγη ἄν Pl. Ap. 36a
.

c rarely with [tense] plpf. referring to action finished in past or present time, λοιπὸν δ' ἂν ἦν ἡμῖν ἔτι περὶ τῆς πόλεως διαλεχθῆναι, εἰ μὴ προτέρα τῶν ἄλλων τὴν εἰρήνην ἐπεποίητο if she had not (as she has done) made peace before the rest, Isoc.5.56, cf. Pl.Ti. 21c.

II with SUBJ., εἰ is regularly joined with ἄν ([dialect] Ep. κε, κεν), cf. ἐάν: Arc. εἰκαν in Tegean Inscrr. of iv B. C. (IG5(2).3.16, 31, 6.2, SIG306.34) should be understood as εἰκ ἄν (εἰ: εἰκ = οὐ: οὐκ), since εἰ δ' ἄν is also found in IG5(2).3.2, 6.45, and εἰκ alone, ib.3.21; but ἄν ([etym.] κε, κεν) are freq. absent in Hom. as Od.5.221, 14.373 (and cf. infr. 2), and Lyr., Pi. (who never uses εἰ with ἄν or κε ([etym.] ν)) P.4.266, al.; in dialects, αἰ δείλητ' ἀγχωρεῖν IG9(1).334.6
([dialect] Locr., v B. C.), cf. Foed.[dialect] Dor. ap. Th.5.79; rarely in Hdt., εἰ μὴ ἀναβῇ 2.13
; occasionally in Trag., A.Eu. 234, S.OT 198 (lyr.), etc.; very rarely in [dialect] Att. Prose, εἰ ξυστῶσιν αἱ πόλεις Th.6.21
; εἴ τι που ἄλσος ἢ τέμενος ἀφειμένον ᾖ Pl.Lg. 761c
: in later Prose, εἴ τις θελήσῃ Apoc.11.5
; εἰ φονεύῃ Plot.2.9.9
, cf. Procl. Inst.26.

1 when the apodosis is [tense] fut., to express a future condition more distinctly and vividly than εἰ c. opt., but less so than εἰ c. [tense] fut. ind. (supr. 1.2a); εἰ δέ κεν ὣς ἕρξῃς καί τοι πείθωνται Ἀχαιοί, γνώσῃ ἔπειθ' .. if thou do thus.., thou shalt know, Il.2.364, cf. 1.128, 3.281, Od.17.549; ἂν δέ τις ἀνθιστῆται, σὺν ὑμῖν πειρασόμεθα χειροῦσθαι X. An.7.3.11
; ἂν μὴ νῦν ἐθέλωμεν ἐκεῖ πολεμεῖν αὐτῷ, ἐνθάδ' ἴσως ἀναγκασθησόμεθα τοῦτο ποιεῖν if we be not now willing, D.4.50, cf. X.Cyr. 5.3.27: folld. by imper., ἢν εἰρήνης δοκῆτε δεῖσθαι, ἄνευ ὅπλων ἥκετε ib.3.2.13, cf. 5.4.30.

2 when the apodosis is present, denoting customary or repeated action, to express a general condition, if ever, ἤν ποτε δασμὸς ἵκηται, σοὶ τὸ γέρας πολὺ μεῖζον (sc. ἐστί) whenever a division comes, your prize is (always) greater, Il.1.166; ἢν ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνῄσκειν if death come near, E.Alc. 671; with ἄν omitted, εἴ περ γάρ τε χόλον.. καταπέψῃ ἀλλά.. ἔχει κότον Il.1.81
.

b with Rhet. present in apodosis, ἐὰν μὴ οἱ φιλόσοφοι βασιλεύσωσιν, οὐκ ἔστι κακῶν παῦλα there is (i.e. can be, will be) no rest.., Pl.R. 473d.

III with OPTATIVE (never with ἄν in early Gr., later ἐάν c. opt., Dam.Pr. 114, al.),

1 to express a future condition less definitely than ἐάν c. subj., usu. with opt. with ἄν in apod., ἦ κεν γηθήσαι Πρίαμος Πριάμοιό τε παῖδες.. εἰ σφῶιν τάδε πάντα πυθοίατο μαρναμένοιιν surely they would exult, if they should hear.., Il.1.255, cf. 7.28, Od.3.223; εἴης φορητὸς οὐκ ἄν, εἰ πράσσοις καλῶς A.Pr. 979
; οὐδὲ γὰρ ἄν με ἐπαινοίη, εἰ ἐξελαύνοιμι τοὺς εὐεργέτας X.An.7.7.11
; οἶκος δ' αὐτός, εἰ φθογγὴν λάβοι, σαφέστατ' ἂν λέξειεν A.Ag.37
, etc.: [tense] fut. opt. is f.l. in Pl.Tht. 164a: with [tense] pres. ind. in apod., Xenoph.34.3, Democr.253: with [tense] fut.ind., Meliss.5.

b in Hom.sts. with [tense] pres. opt., to express an unfulfilled present condition, εἰ μὲν νῦν ἐπὶ ἄλλῳ ἀεθλεύοιμεν, ἦ τ' ἂν ἐγὼ τὰ πρῶτα φεροίμην if we were now contending, etc., Il.23.274: rarely in Trag., εἰ μὴ κνίζοι ( = εἰ μὴ ἔκνιζε) E.Med. 568; also εἰ ἀναγκαῖον εἴη ἀδικεῖν ἢ ἀδικεῖσθαι, ἑλοίμην ἂν μᾶλλον ἀδικεῖσθαι Pl.Grg. 469c
.

2 when the apodosis is past, denoting customary or repeated action, to express a general condition in past time (corresponding to use of subj. in present time, supr. 11.2); once in Hom., εἴ τίς με.. ἐνίπτοι, ἀλλὰ σὺ τόν γ'.. κατέρυκες Il.24.768
; εἰ δέ τινας θορυβουμένους αἴσθοιτο.., κατασβεννύναι τὴν ταραχὴν ἐπειρᾶτο if he should see ( whenever he saw) any troops in confusion, he (always) tried, X.Cyr.5.3.55, cf. An.4.5.13, Mem.4.2.40; εἴ τις ἀντείποι, εὐθὺς ἐτεθνήκει if any one made objection, he was a dead man at once, Th. 8.66; ἀλλ' εἴ τι μὴ φέροιμεν, ὤτρυνεν φέρειν E.Alc. 755
. For εἰ c. ind. in this sense v. supr. 1.1: ind. and opt. are found in same sentence, ἐμίσει, οὐκ εἴ τις κακῶς πάσχων ἠμύνετο, ἀλλ' εἴ τις εὐεργετούμενος ἀχάριστος φαίνοιτο X.Ages.11.3
.

3 in oratio obliqua after past tenses, representing ἐάν c. subj. or εἰ with a primary (never an historical) tense of the ind. in oratio recta, ἐλογίζοντο ὡς, εἰ μὴ μάχοιντο, ἀποστήσοιντο αἱ πόλεις (representing ἐὰν μὴ μαχώμεθα, ἀποστήσονται) X.HG6.4.6, cf. D.21.104, X.HG5.2.2; ἔλεγεν ὅτι, εἰ βλαβερὰ πεπραχὼς εἴη, δίκαιος εἴη ζημιοῦσθαι (representing εἰ βλαβερὰ πέπραχε, δίκαιός ἐστι) ib.32, cf. An.6.6.25; εἰ δέ τινα φεύγοντα λήψοιτο, προηγόρευεν ὅτι ὡς πολεμίψ χρήσοιτο (representing εἴ τινα λήψομαι, χρήσομαι) Id.Cyr.3.1.3; also, where oratio obliqua is implied in the leading clause, οὐκ ἦν τοῦ πολέμου πέρας Φιλίππῳ, εἰ μὴ Θηβαίους.. ἐχθροὺς ποιήσειε τῇ πόλει, i.e. Philip thought there would be no end to the war, unless he should make.. (his thought having been ἐὰν μὴ ποιήσω), D.18.145; ἐβούλοντο γὰρ σφίσιν, εἴ τινα λάβοιεν, ὑπάρχειν ἀντὶ τῶν ἔνδον, ἢν ἄρα τύχωσί τινες ἐζωγρημένοι Th.2.5
.

4 c. opt. with ἄν, only when the clause serves as apodosis as well as protasis, cf. Pl.Prt. 329b, D.4.18, X.Mem.1.5.3 (v. ἄν A. 111
. d).

IV c. INF., in oratio obliqua, only in Hdt., εἰ γὰρ δὴ δεῖν πάντως περιθεῖναι ἄλλῳ τέῳ τὴν βασιληΐην, [ἔφη] δικαιότερον εἶναι κτλ. 1.129
; εἰ εἶναι τοῦτο μὴ φίλον 2.64
, cf. 172, 3.105, 108.

V after Verbs denoting wonder, delight, indignation, disappointment, contentment, and similar emotions, εἰ c. ind. is used instead of ὅτι, to express the object of the feeling in a hypothetical form, θαυμάζω εἰ μηδεὶς ὑμῶν μήτ' ἐνθυμεῖται μήτ' ὀργίζεται, ὁρῶν .. I wonder that no one of you is either concerned or angry when he sees.., D.4.43; οὐκ ἀγαπᾷ εἰ μὴ δίκην δέδωκεν, ἀλλ' εἰ μὴ καὶ χρυσῷ στεφάνῳ στεφανωθήσεται ἀγανακτεῖ Aeschin.3.147
: after past tenses, ἐθαύμασε δ' εἰ μὴ φανερόν ἐστιν X.Mem.1.1.13
; δεινὸν εἰσῄει, εἰ μὴ.. δόξει D.19.33
; ἐθαύμαζον εἴ τι ἕξει τις χρήσασθαι τῷ λόγῳ Pl.Phd. 95a
; οὐδὲ ᾐσχύνθη εἰ.. ἐπάγει D.21.105
: in oratio obliqua (expressed or implied) c. opt., ἐπεῖπεν ὡς δεινὸν (sc. εἴη) εἰ.. μεγαλόψυχος γένοιτο Aeschin.2.157
; ᾤκτιρον εἰ ἁλώσοιντο X.An.1.4.7
; ἐθαύμαζε δ' εἴ τις ἀρετὴν ἐπαγγελλόμενος ἀργύριον πράττοιτο he wondered that any one should demand money, Id.Mem.1.2.7; ἔχαιρον ἀγαπῶν εἴ τις ἐάσοι I rejoiced, being content if any one should let it pass, Pl.R. 450a:—in this use the neg. οὐ is also found, ἀγανακτῶ εἰ ὁ Φίλιππος ἁρπάζων οὐ λυπεῖ D.8.55
; δεινὸν ἂν εἴη εἰ οἱ ἐκείνων ξύμμαχοι οὐκ ἀπεροῦσιν Th.1.121
; τέρας λέγεις, εἰ οὐκ ἂν δύναιντο λαθεῖν Pl.Men. 91d
, etc.

VI in citing a fact as a ground of argument or appeal, as surely as, since, εἴ ποτ' ἔην γε if there was [as there was], i.e. as sure as there was such an one, Il.3.180, al.; εἰ τότε κοῦρος ἔα, νῦν αὖτέ με γῆρας ὀπάζει 4.321
; πολλοὺς γὰρ οἶκε εἶναι εὐπετέστερον διαβάλλειν ἢ ἕνα, εἰ Κλεομένεα μὲν μοῦνον οὐκ οἷός τε ἐγένετο διαβαλεῖν, τρεῖς δὲ μυριάδας Ἀθηναίων ἐποίησε τοῦτο it seems easier to deceive many than one, if (as was the fact, i.e. since) he was not able.., Hdt.5.97, cf. 1.60,al.

VII ELLIPTICAL CONSTRUCTIONS:

1 with apodosis implied in the context, εἰ having the force of in case, supposing that, πρὸς τὴν πόλιν, εἰ ἐπιβοηθοῖεν, ἐχώρουν they marched towards the city [so as to meet the citizens], in case they should rush out, Th.6.100; ἱκέται πρὸς σὲ δεῦρ' ἀφίγμεθα, εἴ τινα πόλιν φράσειας ἡμῖν εὔερον we have come hither to you, in case you should tell us of some fleecy city (i.e. that we might hear of it), Ar.Av. 120; παρέζεο καὶ λαβὲ γούνων, αἴ κέν πως ἐθέλῃσιν ἐπὶ Τρώεσσιν ἀρῆξαι sit by him and grasp his knees [so as to persuade him], in case he be willing to help the Trojans, Il.1.408, cf. 66, Od.1.94, 3.92; ἄκουσον καὶ ἐμοῦ, ἐάν σοι ἔτι ταὐτὰ δοκῇ hear me also [that you may assent], in case the same opinion please you, Pl.R. 358b; ἰδὲ δή, ἐάν σοι ὅπερ ἐμοὶ συνδοκῇ look now, in case you approve what I do, ib. 434a.

2 with apodosis suppressed for rhetorical reasons, εἴ περ γάρ κ' ἐθέλῃσιν Ὀλύμπιος.. στυφελίξαι if he wish to thrust him away, [he will do so], Il.1.580; εἰ μὲν δώσουσι γέρας—· εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they shall give me a prize, [well and good]; but if they give not, then I will take one for myself, 1.135, cf. 6.150, Ar.Pl. 468; καὶ ἢν μὲν ξυμβῇ ἡ πεῖρα—· εἰ δὲ μή .. and if the attempt succeed, [well]; otherwise.., Th.3.3, cf. Pl.Prt. 325d.

3 with the Verb of the protasis omitted, chiefly in the following expressions:

a εἰ μή except, οὐδὲν ἄλλο σιτέονται, εἰ μὴ ἰχθῦς μοῦνον Hdt. 1.200
; μὰ τὼ θεώ, εἰ μὴ Κρίτυλλά γ' [εἰμί]—nay, if I'm not Critylla! i.e. I am, Ar.Th. 898; εἰ μὴ ὅσον except only, ἐγὼ μέν μιν οὐκ εἶδον, εἰ μὴ ὅσον γραφῇ Hdt.2.73
, cf. 1.45, 2.20; εἰ μὴ εἰ Th.1.17
, Pl.Grg. 480b, etc.; εἰ μή τι οὖν, ἀλλὰ σμικρόν γέ μοι τῆς ἀρχῆς χάλασον if nothing else, yet.., Id.Men. 86e; ironical, εἰ μὴ ἄρα ἡ τῆς ἀρετῆς ἐπιμέλεια διαφθορά ἐστιν X.Mem.1.2.8
; εἰ μή πέρ γε τὸν ὑοσκύαμον χρήματα εἶναι φήσομεν Id.Oec.1.13
.

b εἰ δὲ μή but if not, i.e. otherwise, προηγόρευε τοῖς Λαμψακηνοῖσι μετιέναι Μιλτιάδεα, εἰ δὲ μή, σφέας πίτυος τρόπον ἀπείλεε ἐκτρίψειν Hdt.6.37
, cf. 56; after μάλιστα μέν, Th.1.32,35, etc.:—after a preceding neg., μὴ τύπτ'· εἰ δὲ μή, σαυτόν ποτ' αἰτιάσει don't beat me; otherwise, you will have yourself to blame, Ar.Nu. 1433; ὦ Κῦρε, μὴ οὕτω λέγε· εἰ δὲ μή, οὐ θαρροῦντά με ἕξεις X.Cyr.3.1.35
; οὔτ' ἐν τῷ ὕδατι τὰ ὅπλα ἦν ἔχειν· εἰ δὲ μή Id.An.4.3.6
, cf. Th.1.28, 131, Pl.Phd. 91c.

c εἰ δέ sts. stands for εἰ δὲ μή, εἰ μὲν βούλεται, ἑψέτω· εἰ δ', ὅτι βούλεται, τοῦτο ποιείτω Pl.Euthd. 285c
, cf. Smp. 212c; εἰ δ' οὖν S.Ant. 722
; εἰ δ' οὕτως Arist.EN 1094a24
; εἰ δὲ τοῦτο and if so, Str.2.1.29.

d εἰ γάρ for if so, Id.7.3.6.

e εἴ τις if any, i. e. as much as or more than any, τῶν γε νῦν αἴ τις ἐπιχθονίων, ὀρθῶς B.5.5
; ὄτλον ἄλγιστον ἔσχον, εἴ τις Αἰτωλὶς γυνή S.Tr.8
, cf. OC 734; εἴ τις ἄλλος, siquis alius, E.Andr.6, etc.; εἴ τινες καὶ ἄλλοι Hdt.3.2
, etc.; εἴπερ τις ἄλλος Pl.R. 501d
; also κατ' εἰ δέ τινα τρόπον in any way, IG 5(2).6.27 ([place name] Tegea).

f εἴ ποτε or εἴπερ ποτέ now if ever, ἡμῖν δὲ καλῶς, εἴπερ ποτέ, ἔχει.. ἡ ξυναλλαγή Th.4.20
, cf. Ar.Eq. 594; αἴ ποτα κἄλλοτα Alc.Supp.7.11
, cf. X.An.6.4.12, etc.; but in prayers, εἴ ποτέ τοι ἐπὶ νηὸν ἔρεψα.. τόδε μοι κρήηνον ἐέλδωρ Il.1.39
.

g εἴ ποθεν (sc. δυνατόν ἐστι) if from any quarter, i.e. from some quarter or other, S.Ph. 1204 (lyr.); so εἴ ποθι somewhere, anywhere, Id.Aj. 885 (lyr.); εἴ που Od.4.193
.

h εἴ πως ib. 388, X.An.2.3.11: in an elliptical sentence (cf. VII. 1), πρέσβεις πέμψαντες, εἴ πως πείσειαν Th.1.58
.

VIII with other PARTICLES:

1 for the distinction between καὶ εἰ (or καὶ ἐάν, or κἄν ) even if, and εἰ καί (or ἐὰν καί ) even though, v. καί:—the opposite of καὶ εἰ is οὐδ' εἰ, not even if; that of εἰ καί is εἰ μηδέ, if (although) not even.

2 for ὡς εἰ, ὡς εἴ τε, ὥσπερ εἰ, etc., v. ὡς and ὥσπερ.

3 for εἰ ἄρα, v. ἄρα; for εἰ δή, εἴπερ, v. εἰ δή, εἴπερ; for εἴ γε, v. γέ.

IX in neg. oaths, = Hebr. im, LXXPs.94(95).11, Ev.Marc.8.12, al.

C IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS, whether, folld. by the ind., subj., or opt., according to the principles of oratio obliqua:

1 with IND. after primary tenses, representing the same tense in the direct question, σάφα δ' οὐκ οἶδ' εἰ θεός ἐστιν whether he is a god, Il.5.183; εἰ ξυμπονήσεις.. σκόπει S.Ant.41
.

2 with SUBJ. after primary tenses, representing a dubitative subj. in the direct question, τὰ ἐκπώματα οὐκ οἶδ' εἰ Χρυσάντᾳ τουτῳῒ δῶ whether I should give them, X.Cyr.8.4.16: sts. elliptical, ἐς τὰ χρηστήρια ἔπεμπε, εἰ στρατεύηται ἐπὶ τοὺς Πέρσας Hdt.1.75
.

3 OPT. after past tenses, representing either of the two previous constructions in the direct question, ἤρετο εἴ τις ἐμοῦ εἴη σοφώτερος he asked whether any one was wiser than I (direct ἔστι τις σοφώτερος;), Pl.Ap. 21a; ἐπεκηρυκεύετο Πεισιστράτῳ, εἰ βούλοιτό οἱ τὴν θυγατέρα ἔχειν γυναῖκα Hdt.1.60
: rarely [tense] aor. opt. for the [tense] aor. ind., ἠρώτων αὐτὸν εἰ ἀναπλεύσειεν I asked him whether he had set sail (direct ἀνέπλευσας;), D.50.55: but [tense] aor. opt. usually represents [tense] aor. subj., τὸν θεὸν ἐπήροντο εἰ παραδοῖεν Κορινθίοις τὴν πόλιν.. καὶ τιμωρίαν τινὰ πειρῷντ' ἀπ' αὐτῶν ποιεῖσθαι they asked whether they should deliver their city to the Corinthians, and should try.., Th.1.25:—in both constructions the ind. or subj. may be retained, ψῆφον ἐβούλοντο ἐπαγαγεῖν εἰ χρὴ πολεμεῖν ib. 119; ἐβουλεύοντο εἴτε κατακαύσωσιν.. εἴτε τι ἄλλο χρήσωνται whether they should burn them or should dispose of them in some other way, Id.2.4; ἀνακοινοῦσθαι αὐτὸν αὑτῷ εἰ δῷ ἐπιψηφίσαι τοῖς προέδροις [he said that] he consulted him whether he should give.., Aeschin.2.68.

4 with OPT. and ἄν when this was the form of the direct question, ἠρώτων εἰ δοῖεν ἂν τούτων τὰ πιστά they asked whether they would give (direct δοιήτε ἄν;), X.An.4.8.7.

5 the NEG. used with εἰ in indirect questions is οὐ, when οὐ would be used in the direct question, ἐνετέλλετο.. εἰρωτᾶν εἰ οὔ τι ἐπαισχύνεται whether he is not ashamed, Hdt.1.90, etc.; but if μή would be required in the direct form, it is retained in the indirect, οὐ τοῦτο ἐρωτῶ, ἀλλ' εἰ τοῦ μὲν δικαίου μὴ ἀξιοῖ πλέον ἔχειν μηδὲ βούλεται ὁ δίκαιος, τοῦ δὲ ἀδίκου (the direct question would be μὴ ἀξιοῖ μηδὲ βούλεται; he does not see fit nor wish, does he?) Pl.R. 349b:—in double indirect questions, εἴτε.. εἴτε.. ; εἰ.. εἴτε.. ; εἴτε.. ἢ .., either οὐ or μή can be used in the second clause, ὅπως ἴδῃς εἴτ' ἔνδον εἴτ' οὐκ ἔνδον S.Aj.7
; σκοπῶμεν εἰ ἡμῖν πρέπει ἢ οὔ Pl.R. 451d
; εἰ ἀληθὲς ἢ μή, πειράσομαι μαθεῖν ib. 339a; πολλὰ ἂν περιεσκέψω, εἴτε ἐπιτρεπτέον εἴτε οὔ·.. οὐδένα λόγον οὐδὲ συμβουλὴν ποιῇ, εἴτε χρὴ ἐπιτρέπειν σαυτὸν αὐτῷ εἴτε μή Id.Prt. 313a
, 313b; ἀνάγκη τὴν ἐμὴν μητέρα, εἴτε θυγάτηρ ἦν Κίρωνος εἴτε μή, καὶ εἰ παρ' ἐκείνῳ διῃτᾶτο ἢ οὔ, καὶ γάμους εἰ διττοὺς ὑπὲρ ταύτης εἱστίασεν ἢ μὴ.. πάντα ταῦτα εἰδέναι τοὺς οἰκέτας Is.8.9
; τοὺς νόμους καταμανθάνειν εἰ καλῶς κεῖνται ἢ μή.. τοὺς λόγους εἰ ὀρθῶς ὑμᾶς διδάσκουσιν ἢ οὔ Antipho 5.14.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > εἰ
8 БИБЛИОГРАФИЯ

Мы приняли следующие сокращения для наиболее часто упоминаемых книг и журналов:

IJP - International Journal of Psycho-analysis

JAPA - Journal of the American Psychoanalytic Association

SE - Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological Works of Sigmund Freud, ed. James Strachey (London: Hogarth Press and the Institute of Psycho-Analysis, 1953—74.)

PSOC - Psychoanalytic Study of the Child (New Haven: Yale University Press)

PQ - Psychoanalytic Quarterly

WAF - The Writings of Anna Freud, ed. Anna Freud (New York: International Universities Press, 1966—74)

PMC - Psychoanalysis The Major Concepts ed. Burness E. Moore and Bernard D. Fine (New Haven: Yale University Press)

\

О словаре: _about - Psychoanalytic Terms and Concepts

\

1. Abend, S. M. Identity. PMC. Forthcoming.

2. Abend, S. M. (1974) Problems of identity. PQ, 43.

3. Abend, S. M., Porder, M. S. & Willick, M. S. (1983) Borderline Patients. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

4. Abraham, K. (1916) The first pregenital stage of libido. Selected Papers. London, Hogarth Press, 1948.

5. Abraham, K. (1917) Ejaculatio praecox. In: selected Papers. New York Basic Books.

6. Abraham, K. (1921) Contributions to the theory of the anal character. Selected Papers. New York: Basic Books, 1953.

7. Abraham, K. (1924) A Short study of the development of the libido, viewed in the light of mental disorders. In: Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1927.

8. Abraham, K. (1924) Manic-depressive states and the pre-genital levels of the libido. In: Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1949.

9. Abraham, K. (1924) Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1948.

10. Abraham, K. (1924) The influence of oral erotism on character formation. Ibid.

11. Abraham, K. (1925) The history of an impostor in the light of psychoanalytic knowledge. In: Clinical Papers and Essays on Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books, 1955, vol. 2.

12. Abrams, S. (1971) The psychoanalytic unconsciousness. In: The Unconscious Today, ed. M. Kanzer. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

13. Abrams, S. (1981) Insight. PSOC, 36.

14. Abse, D W. (1985) The depressive character In Depressive States and their Treatment, ed. V. Volkan New York: Jason Aronson.

15. Abse, D. W. (1985) Hysteria and Related Mental Disorders. Bristol: John Wright.

16. Ackner, B. (1954) Depersonalization. J. Ment. Sci., 100.

17. Adler, A. (1924) Individual Psychology. New York: Harcourt, Brace.

18. Akhtar, S. (1984) The syndrome of identity diffusion. Amer. J. Psychiat., 141.

19. Alexander, F. (1950) Psychosomatic Medicine. New York: Norton.

20. Allen, D. W. (1974) The Feat- of Looking. Charlottesvill, Va: Univ. Press of Virginia.

21. Allen, D. W. (1980) Psychoanalytic treatment of the exhibitionist. In: Exhibitionist, Description, Assessment, and Treatment, ed. D. Cox. New York: Garland STPM Press.

22. Allport, G. (1937) Personality. New York: Henry Holt.

23. Almansi, R. J. (1960) The face-breast equation. JAPA, 6.

24. Almansi, R. J. (1979) Scopophilia and object loss. PQ, 47.

25. Altman, L. Z. (1969) The Dream in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

26. Altman, L. Z. (1977) Some vicissitudes of love. JAPA, 25.

27. American Psychiatric Association. (1987) Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 3d ed. revised. Washington, D. C.

28. Ansbacher, Z. & Ansbacher, R. (1956) The Individual Psychology of Alfred Adler. New York: Basic Books.

29. Anthony, E. J. (1981) Shame, guilt, and the feminine self in psychoanalysis. In: Object and Self, ed. S. Tuttman, C. Kaye & M. Zimmerman. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

30. Arlow. J. A. (1953) Masturbation and symptom formation. JAPA, 1.

31. Arlow. J. A. (1959) The structure of the deja vu experience. JAPA, 7.

32. Arlow. J. A. (1961) Ego psychology and the study of mythology. JAPA, 9.

33. Arlow. J. A. (1963) Conflict, regression and symptom formation. IJP, 44.

34. Arlow. J. A. (1966) Depersonalization and derealization. In: Psychoanalysis: A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

35. Arlow. J. A. (1969) Fantasy, memory and reality testing. PQ, 38.

36. Arlow. J. A. (1969) Unconscious fantasy and disturbances of mental experience. PQ, 38.

37. Arlow. J. A. (1970) The psychopathology of the psychoses. IJP, 51.

38. Arlow. J. A. (1975) The structural hypothesis. PQ, 44.

39. Arlow. J. A. (1977) Affects and the psychoanalytic situation. IJP, 58.

40. Arlow. J. A. (1979) Metaphor and the psychoanalytic situation. PQ, 48.

41. Arlow. J. A. (1979) The genesis of interpretation. JAPA, 27 (suppl.).

42. Arlow. J. A. (1982) Problems of the superego concept. PSOC, 37.

43. Arlow. J. A. (1984) Disturbances of the sense of time. PQ, 53.

44. Arlow. J. A. (1985) Some technical problems of countertransference. PQ, 54.

45. Arlow, J. A. & Brenner, C. (1963) Psychoanalytic Concepts and the Structural Theory, New York: Int. Univ. Press.

46. Arlow, J. A. & Brenner, C. (1969) The psychopathology of the psychoses. IJP, 50.

47. Asch, S. S. (1966) Depression. PSOC, 21.

48. Asch, S. S. (1976) Varieties of negative therapeutic reactions and problems of technique. JAPA, 24.

49. Atkins, N. (1970) The Oedipus myth. Adolescence, and the succession of generations. JAPA, 18.

50. Atkinson, J. W. & Birch, D. (1970) The Dynamics of Action. New York: Wiley.

51. Bachrach, H. M. & Leaff, L. A. (1978) Analyzability. JAPA, 26.

52. Bacon, C. (1956) A developmental theory of female homosexuality. In: Perversions,ed, S. Lorand & M. Balint. New York: Gramercy.

53. Bak, R. C. (1953) Fetishism. JAPA. 1.

54. Bak, R. C. (1968) The phallic woman. PSOC, 23.

55. Bak, R. C. & Stewart, W. A. (1974) Fetishism, transvestism, and voyeurism. An American Handbook of Psychiatry, ed. S. Arieti. New York: Basic Books, vol. 3.

56. Balint, A. (1949) Love for mother and mother-love. IJP, 30.

57. Balter, L., Lothane, Z. & Spencer, J. H. (1980) On the analyzing instrument, PQ, 49.

58. Basch, M. F. (1973) Psychoanalysis and theory formation. Ann. Psychoanal., 1.

59. Basch, M. F. (1976) The concept of affect. JAPA, 24.

60. Basch, M. F. (1981) Selfobject disorders and psychoanalytic theory. JAPA, 29.

61. Basch, M. F. (1983) Emphatic understanding. JAPA. 31.

62. Balldry, F. Character. PMC. Forthcoming.

63. Balldry, F. (1983) The evolution of the concept of character in Freud's writings. JAPA. 31.

64. Begelman, D. A. (1971) Misnaming, metaphors, the medical model and some muddles. Psychiatry, 34.

65. Behrends, R. S. & Blatt, E. J. (1985) Internalization and psychological development throughout the life cycle. PSOC, 40.

66. Bell, A. (1961) Some observations on the role of the scrotal sac and testicles JAPA, 9.

67. Benedeck, T. (1949) The psychosomatic implications of the primary unit. Amer. J. Orthopsychiat., 19.

68. Beres, C. (1958) Vicissitudes of superego functions and superego precursors in childhood. FSOC, 13.

69. Beres, D. Conflict. PMC. Forthcoming.

70. Beres, D. (1956) Ego deviation and the concept of schizophrenia. PSOC, 11.

71. Beres, D. (1960) Perception, imagination and reality. IJP, 41.

72. Beres, D. (1960) The psychoanalytic psychology of imagination. JAPA, 8.

73. Beres, D. & Joseph, E. D. (1965) Structure and function in psychoanalysis. IJP, 46.

74. Beres, D. (1970) The concept of mental representation in psychoanalysis. IJP, 51.

75. Berg, M D. (1977) The externalizing transference. IJP, 58.

76. Bergeret, J. (1985) Reflection on the scientific responsi bilities of the International Psychoanalytical Association. Memorandum distributed at 34th IPA Congress, Humburg.

77. Bergman, A. (1978) From mother to the world outside. In: Grolnick et. al. (1978).

78. Bergmann, M. S. (1980) On the intrapsychic function of falling in love. PQ, 49.

79. Berliner, B. (1966) Psychodynamics of the depressive character. Psychoanal. Forum, 1.

80. Bernfeld, S. (1931) Zur Sublimierungslehre. Imago, 17.

81. Bibring, E. (1937) On the theory of the therapeutic results of psychoanalysis. IJP, 18.

82. Bibring, E. (1941) The conception of the repetition compulsion. PQ, 12.

83. Bibring, E. (1953) The mechanism of depression. In: Affective Disorders, ed. P. Greenacre. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

84. Bibring, E. (1954) Psychoanalysis and the dynamic psychotherapies. JAPA, 2.

85. Binswanger, H. (1963) Positive aspects of the animus. Zьrich: Spring.

86. Bion Francesca Abingdon: Fleetwood Press.

87. Bion, W. R. (1952) Croup dynamics. IJP, 33.

88. Bion, W. R. (1961) Experiences in Groups. London: Tavistock.

89. Bion, W. R. (1962) A theory of thinking. IJP, 40.

90. Bion, W. R. (1962) Learning from Experience. London: William Heinemann.

91. Bion, W. R. (1963) Elements of Psychoanalysis. London: William Heinemann.

92. Bion, W. R. (1965) Transformations. London: William Heinemann.

93. Bion, W. R. (1970) Attention and Interpretation. London: Tavistock.

94. Bion, W. R. (1985) All My Sins Remembered, ed. Francesca Bion. Adingdon: Fleetwood Press.

95. Bird, B. (1972) Notes on transference. JAPA, 20.

96. Blanck, G. & Blanck, R. (1974) Ego Psychology. New York: Columbia Univ. Press.

97. Blatt, S. J. (1974) Levels of object representation in anaclitic and introjective depression. PSOC, 29.

98. Blau, A. (1955) A unitary hypothesis of emotion. PQ, 24.

99. Bleuler, E. (1911) Dementia Praecox or the Group of Schizophrenias. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1951.

100. Blos, P. (1954) Prolonged adolescence. Amer. J. Orthopsychiat., 24.

101. Blos, P. (1962) On Adolescence. New York: Free Press.

102. Blos, P. (1972) The epigenesia of the adult neurosis. 27.

103. Blos, P. (1979) Modification in the traditional psychoanalytic theory of adolescent development. Adolescent Psychiat., 8.

104. Blos, P. (1984) Son and father. JAPA_. 32.

105. Blum, G. S. (1963) Prepuberty and adolescence, In Studies ed. R. E. Grinder. New York: McMillan.

106. Blum, H. P. Symbolism. FMC. Forthcoming.

107. Blum, H. P. (1976) Female Psychology. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).

108. Blum, H. P. (1976) Masochism, the ego ideal and the psychology of women. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).

109. Blum, H. P. (1980) The value of reconstruction in adult psychoanalysis. IJP, 61.

110. Blum, H. P. (1981) Forbidden quest and the analytic ideal. PQ, 50.

111. Blum, H. P. (1983) Defense and resistance. Foreword. JAFA, 31.

112. Blum, H. P., Kramer, Y., Richards, A. K. & Richards, A. D., eds. (1988) Fantasy, Myth and Reality: Essays in Honor of Jacob A. Arlow. Madison, Conn.: Int. Univ. Press.

113. Boehm, F. (1930) The femininity-complex In men. IJP,11.

114. Boesky, D. Structural theory. PMC. Forthcoming.

115. Boesky, D. (1973) Deja raconte as a screen defense. PQ, 42.

116. Boesky, D. (1982) Acting out. IJP, 63.

117. Boesky, D. (1986) Questions about Sublimation In Psychoanalysis the Science of Mental Conflict, ed. A. D. Richards & M. S. Willick. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.

118. Bornstein, B. (1935) Phobia in a 2 1/2-year-old child. PQ, 4.

119. Bornstein, B. (1951) On latency. PSOC, 6.

120. Bornstein, M., ed. (1983) Values and neutrality in psychoanalysis. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 3.

121. Bowlby, J. (1960) Grief and morning in infancy and early childhood. PSOC. 15.

122. Bowlby, J. (1961) Process of mourning. IJP. 42.

123. Bowlby, J. (1980) Attachment and Loss, vol. 3. New York: Basic Books.

124. Bradlow, P. A. (1973) Depersonalization, ego splitting, non-human fantasy and shame. IJP, 54.

125. Brazelton, T. B., Kozlowsky, B. & Main, M. (1974) The early motherinfant interaction. In: The Effect of the Infant on Its Caregiver, ed. M. Lewis & L. Rosenblum New York Wiley.

126. Brenner, C. (1957) The nature and development of the concept of repression in Freud's writings. PSOC, 12.

127. Brenner, C. (1959) The masochistic character. JAPA, 7.

128. Brenner, C. (1973) An Elementary Textbook of Psycho-analysis. New York Int. Univ. Press.

129. Brenner, C. (1974) On the nature and development of affects PQ, 43.

130. Brenner, C. (1976) Psychoanalytic Technique and Psychic Conflict. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

131. Brenner, C. (1979) The Mind in Conflict. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

132. Brenner, C. (1979) Working alliance, therapeutic alliance and transference. JAPA, 27.

133. Brenner, C. (1981) Defense and defense mechanisms. PQ, 50.

134. Brenner, C. (1983) Defense. In: the Mind in Conflict. New York Int. Univ. Press.

135. Bressler, B. (1965) The concept of the self. Psychoanalytic Review, 52.

136. Breuer, J. & Freud, S. (1983—95) Studies on Hysteria. SE, 3.

137. Breznitz, S., ed. (1983) The Denial of Stress. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

138. Brody, S. (1964) Passivity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

139. Brown, H. (1970) Psycholinquistics. New York: Free Press.

140. Bruner, J. S. (1964) The course of cognitive growth. Amer. Psychologist. 19.

141. Bruner, J., Jolly, A. & Sylva, K. (1976) Play. New York Basic Books.

142. Bruner, J. E., Olver, R. R. &Greenfield, P. M. (1966) Studies in Cognitive Growth. New York: Wiley.

143. Buie, D H. (1981) Empathy. JAPA, 29.

144. Burgner, M. & Edgeumble, R. (1972) Some problems in the conceptualization of early object relationships. PSOC, 27.

145. Call, J. ed. (1979) Basic Handbook of Child Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books.

146. Carroll, G. (1956) Language, Thought and Reality. Cambridge & London: M. I. T. Press & John Wiley.

147. Cavenar, J. O. & Nash, J. L. (1976) The effects of Combat on the normal personality. Comprehensive Psychiat., 17.

148. Chassequet-Smirgel, J. (1978) Reflections on the connection between perversion and sadism. IJP, 59.

149. Chomsky, N. (1978) Language and unconscious knowledge. In: Psychoanalysis and Language, ed. J. H. Smith. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press, vol. 3.

150. Clower, V. (1975) Significance of masturbation in female sexual development and function. In: Masturbation from Infancy to Senescence, ed. I. Marcus & J. Francis. New York: Int. Uni" Press.

151. Coen, S. J. & Bradlow, P. A. (1982) Twin transference as a compromise formation. JAPA, 30.

152. Compton, A. Object and relationships. PMC. Forthcoming.

153. Cullen, W. (1777) First Lines of the Practice of Psysic. Edinburgh: Bell, Brandfute.

154. Curtis, B. C. (1969) Psychoanalytic understanding and treatment of impotence. In: Sexual Function and Dysfunction, ed. P. J. Fink & V. B. O. Hummett. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis.

155. Darwin, C. (1874) The Descent of Man. New York: Hurst.

156. Davidoff-Hirsch, H. (1985) Oedipal and preoedipal phenomena. JAPA, 33.

157. Davis, M. & Wallbridge, D. (1981) Boundary and Space. New York: Brunner-Mazel.

158. Deutsch, H. (1932) Homosexuality in women. PQ, 1.

159. Deutsch, H. (1934) Some forms of emotional disturbance and their relationship to schizophrenia. PQ, 11.

160. Deutsch, H. (1937) Absence of grief. PQ, 6.

161. Deutsch, H. (1942) Some forms of emotional disturbance and their relationship to schizophrenia. PQ, 11.

162. Deutsch, H. (1955) The impostor. In: Neuroses and Character Types. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1965.

163. Devereux, G. (1953) Why Oedipus killed Lains. IJP, 34.

164. Dewald, P. (1982) Psychoanalytic perspectives On resistance. In: resistance, Psychodynamics. and Behavioral Approaches, ed. P. Wachtel. New York: Plenum Press.

165. Dickes, R. (1963) Fetishistic behavior. JAPA. 11.

166. Dickes, R. (1965) The defensive function of an altered state of consciousness. JAPA, 13.

167. Dickes, R. (1967) Severe regressive disruption of the therapeutic alliance. JAPA, 15.

168. Dickes, R. (1981) Sexual myths and misinformation. In: Understanding Human Behaviour in Health and Illness, ed. R. C. Simon & H. Pardes. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.

169. Dorpat, T. L. (1985) Denial and Defense in the Therapeutic Situation. New York: Jason Aronson.

170. Downey, T. W. (1978) Transitional phenomena in the analysis of early adolescent males. PSOC, 33.

171. Dunbar, F. (1954) Emotions and Bodily Functions. New York: Columbia Univ. Press.

172. Easson, W. M. (1973) The earliest ego development, primitive memory traces, and the Isakower phenomenon. PQ, 42.

173. Edelheit, H. (1971) Mythopoiesis and the primal scene. Psychoanal. Study Society, 5.

174. Edgcumbe, R. & Burgner, M. (1972) Some problems in the conceptualization of early object relation ships, part I. PSOC, 27.

175. Edgcumbe, R. & Burgner, M. (1975) The phallicnarcissistic phase. PSOC, 30.

176. Eidelberg, L. (1960) A third contribution to the study of slips of the tongue. IJP, 41.

177. Eidelberg, L. (1968) Encyclopedia of Psychoanalysis. New York: The Free Press; London: Collier-MacMillan.

178. Eissler, K. R. (1953) The effect of the structure of the ego on psychoanalytic technique. JAPA, 1.

179. Ellenberg, H. F. (1970) The Discovery of the Unconscious. New York: Basic Books.

180. Emde, R. N. (1980) Toward a psychoanalytic theory of affect: I. & G. H. Pollock. Washington NYMH.

181. Emde R., Gaensbaner, T. & Harmon R. (1976) Emotional Expression in Infancy. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

182. Erode R. & Harmon, R. J. (1972) Endogenous and exogenous smiling systems in early infancy. J. Amer. Acad. Child Psychiat., 11.

183. Engel, G. L. (1962) Psychological Development in Health and Disease. New York Saunders.

184. Engel, G. L. (1967) Psychoanalytic theory of somatic disorder. JAPA, 15.

185. Engel, G. L. (1968) A reconsideration of the role of conversion in somatic disease. Compr. Psychiat., 94.

186. English, H. B. & English, A. C. (1958) A comprehensive Dictionary of Psychological and Psychoanalytical Terms. New York: David McKay.

187. Erard, R. (1983) New wine in old skins. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 10.

188. Erdelyi, M. H. (1985) Psychoanalysis. New York: W. H. Freeman.

189. Erikson, E. H. (1950) Childhood and Society. New York: Norton.

190. Erikson, E. H. (1956) The concept of ego identity. JAPA, 4.

191. Erikson, E. H. (1956) The problem of ego identity. JAPA, 4.

192. Esman, A. H. (1973) The primal scene. PSOC, 28.

193. Esman, A. H. (1975) The Psychology of Adolescence. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

194. Esman, A. H. (1979) Some reflections on boredom. JAPA, 27.

195. Esman, A. H. (1983) The "stimulus barrier": a review and reconsideration. PSOC, 38.

196. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1952) Psychoanalytic Studies of the Personality. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.

197. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1954) An Object-Relations Theory of the Personality. New York: Basic Books.

198. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1963) Synopsis of an Object-Relations theory of the personality. IJP, 44.

199. Fawcett, J., Clark, D. C., Scheftner, W. H. & Hedecker, D. (1983) Differences between anhedonia and normal hedonic depressive states. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 40.

200. Fenichel, O. (1934) On the psychology of boredom. Collected Papers. New York: Norton, 1953, vol. 1.

201. Fenichel, O. (1941) Problems of Psychoanalytic Technique. Albany, N. Y.: Psychoanalytic Quaterly.

202. Fenichel, O. (1945) Character disorders. In: The Psychoanalytic Theory of the Neurosis. New York: Norton.

203. Fenichel, O. (1945) The Psychoanalytic Theory of Neurosis New York: Norton.

204. Fenichel, O. (1954) Ego strength and ego weakness. Collected Papers. New York: Norton, vol. 2.

205. Ferenczi, S. (1909) Introjection and transference. In: Sex in Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books.

206. Ferenczi, S. (191617) Disease or patho-neurosis. The Theory and Technique of Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press, 1950.

207. Ferenczi, S. (1925) Psychoanalysis of sexual habits. In: The Theory and Technique of Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books.

208. Fine, B. D., Joseph, E. D. & Waldhorn, H. F., eds. (1971) Recollection and Reconstruction in Psychoanalysis. Monograph 4, Kris Study Group. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

209. Fink, G. (1967) Analysis of the Isakower phenomenon. JAPA, 15.

210. Fink, P. J. (1970) Correlation between "actual" neurosis and the work of Masters and Johson. P. Q, 39.

211. Finkenstein, L. (1975) Awe premature ejaculation. P. Q, 44.

212. Firestein, S. K. (1978) A review of the literature. In: Termination in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

213. Fisher, C. et. al. (1957) A study of the preliminary stages of the construction of dreams and images. JAPA, 5.

214. Fisher, C. et. al. (1968) Cycle of penile erection synchronous with dreaming (REM) sleep. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 12.

215. Fliess, R. (1942) The metapsychology of the analyst. PQ, 12.

216. Fliess, R. (1953) The Revival of Interest in the Dream. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

217. Fodor, N. & Gaynor, F. (1950) Freud: Dictionary of Psycho-analysis. New York: Philosophical Library.

218. Fordham, M. (1969) Children as Individuals. London: Hodder & Stoughton.

219. Fordham, M. (1976) The Self and Autism. London: Academic Press.

220. Fraiberg, S. (1969) Object constancy and mental representation. PSOC, 24.

221. Frank, A. Metapsychology. PMS. Forthcoming.

222. Frank, A. & Muslin, H. (1967) The development of Freud's concept of primal repression. PSOC, 22.

223. Frank, H. (1977) Dynamic patterns for failure in college students. Can. Psychiat. Ass. J., 22.

224. French, T. & Fromm, E. (1964) Dream Interpretation. New York: Basic Books.

225. Freud, A. (1936) The Ego and the Mechanisms of Defense. New York Int. Univ. Press.

226. Freud, A. (1951) Observations on child development. PSOC, 6.

227. Freud, A. (1952) The mutual influences in the development of ego and id. WAF, 4.

228. Freud, A. (1958) Adolescence. WAF, 5.

229. Freud, A. (1962) Assessment of childhood disturbances. PSOC, 17.

230. Freud, A. (1962) Comments on psychic trauma. In: Furst (1967).

231. Freud, A. (1963) The concept of developmental lines. PSOC, 18.

232. Freud, A. (1965) Assessment of pathology, part 2. WAF, 6.

233. Freud, A. (1965) Normality and Pathology in Childhood. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

234. Freud, A. (1970) The infantile neurosis. WAF, 7.

235. Freud, A. (1971) Comments on aggression. IJP, 53.

236. Freud, A. (1971) The infantile neurosis. PSOC, 26.

237. Freud, A. (1981) Insight. PSOC, 36.

238. Freud, S. (1887—1902) Letters to Wilhelm Fliess. New York: Basic Books, 1954.

239. Freud, S. (1891) On the interpretation of the aphasias. SE, 3.

240. Freud, S. (1893—95) Studies on hysteria. SE, 2.

241. Freud, S. (1894) The neuropsychoses of defence. SE, 3.

242. Freud, S. (1895) On the ground for detaching a particular syndrome from neurasthenia under the description "anxiety neurosis". SE, 3.

243. Freud, S. (1895) Project for a scientific psychology. SE, 1.

244. Freud, S. (1896) Draft K, Jameary 1, 1896, Neuroses of defense (A Christmas fairytale). In: Extracts from the Fliess papers (1892—99).

245. Freud, S. (1896) Further remarks on the neuropsychosis of defense. SE, 3.

246. Freud, S. (1896) Heredity and aetiology of neurosis. SE, 3.

247. Freud, S. (1898) Sexuality in the aetiology of the neurosis. SE, 3.

248. Freud, S. (1899) Screen memories. SE, 3.

249. Freud, S. (1900) The interpretation of dreams. SE, 4—5.

250. Freud, S. (1901) Childhood memories and screen memories SE, 6.

251. Freud, S. (1901) On dreams. SE, 5.

252. Freud, S. (1901) The psychopathology of everyday life. SE, 6.

253. Freud, S. (1905) Fragments of an analysis of a case of hysteria. SE, 7.

254. Freud, S. (1905) Jokes and their relation to the unconscious. SE, 8.

255. Freud, S. (1905) Psysical (or mental) treatment. SE, 7.

256. Freud, S. (1905) Three essays on the theory of sexuality. SE. 7.

257. Freud, S. (1908) Character and anal erotism. SE, 9.

258. Freud, S. (1908) On the sexual theories of children. SE, 9.

259. Freud, S. (1908) Preface to Wilhelm Stekel's Nervous Anxiety-States and Their Treatment. SE, 9.

260. Freud, S. (1909) Analysis of a phobia in a five-year-old boy. SE, 10.

261. Freud, S. (1909) Family romances. SE, 9.

262. Freud, S. (1909) Notes upon a case of obsessional neurosis. SE, 10.

263. Freud, S. (1910) A special type of choice of object made by men. SE, 11.

264. Freud, S. (1910) The autithentical meaning of primal words. SE, 11.

265. Freud, S. (1910) The future prospects of psychoanalytic therapy. SE, 11.

266. Freud, S. (1910) The psychoanalytic view of psychogenic disturbance of vision. SE, 11.

267. Freud, S. (1911) Formulations on the two principles of mental functioning. SE, 12.

268. Freud, S. (1911) Notes on a case of paranoia. SE, 12.

269. Freud, S. (1911) Psychoanalytic notes on an autobiographical account of a case of paranoia. SE, 12.

270. Freud, S. (1911—15) Papers on technique. SE, 12.

271. Freud, S. (1912) Contribution to a discussion on masturbation. SE, 12.

272. Freud, S. (1912) On the universal tendency to abasement in the sphere of love. SE, 11.

273. Freud, S. (1912) The dynamics of transference. SE, 12.

274. Freud, S. (1913) Editor's note The disposition to obsessional neurosis. SE, 12.

275. Freud, S. (1913) On beginning the treatment. SE, 12.

276. Freud, S. (1913) Totem and taboo. SE, 13.

277. Freud, S. (1914) Fausse reconnaissance (deja reconte) in psychoanalytic treatment. SE, 13.

278. Freud, S. (1914) Mourning and melancholia. SE, 15.

279. Freud, S. (1914) Observations on transference love. SE, 12.

280. Freud, S. (1914) On narcissism. SE. 14.

281. Freud, S. (1914) On the history of the psychoanalytic movement. SE, 14.

282. Freud, S. (1914) Remembering, repeating, and working-through. SE, 12.

283. Freud, S. (1914—16) Some character types met with in psychoanalysis. (II) Those wrecked by success SE, 14.

284. Freud, S. (1915) Das UnbewuЯte. Gesammelte Werke, 10.

285. Freud, S. (1915) Instincts and their vicissitudes. SE, 14.

286. Freud, S. (1915) Observation on transference-love. SE, I2.

287. Freud, S. (1915) Repression. SE, 14.

288. Freud, S. (1915) The unconscious. SE, 14.

289. Freud, S. (1915—17) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 15 & 16.

290. Freud, S. (1916) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 16.

291. Freud, S. (1916) Some character types met with in psychoanalytic work. SE, 16.

292. Freud, S. (1917) A metapsychological supplement to the theory of dreams. SE, 14.

293. Freud, S. (1917) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 16.

294. Freud, S. (1917) Mourning and melancholia. SE, 14.

295. Freud, S. (1917) On transformations of instinct as exemplified in anal erotism. SE, 17.

296. Freud, S. (1918) From the history of an infantile neurosis. SE, 17.

297. Freud, S. (1919) "A child is being beaten". SE, 17.

298. Freud, S. (1919) Lines of advance in psychoanalytic therapy. SE, 17.

299. Freud, S. (1919) The uncanny. SE, 17.

300. Freud, S. (1920) Beyond the pleasure principle. SE, 18.

301. Freud, S. (1920) The Psychogenesis of a case of homosexuality in a woman. SE, 18.

302. Freud, S. (1921) Group psychology and the analysis of the ego. SE, 18.

303. Freud, S. (1923) The ego and the id. SE, 19.

304. Freud, S. (1923) The infantile genital organization. SE, 19.

305. Freud, S. (1924) A short account of psychoanalysis. SE, 19.

306. Freud, S. (1924) Neurosis and psychosis. SE, 19.

307. Freud, S. (1924) The dissolution of the Oedipus complex SE, 19.

308. Freud, S. (1924) The economic problem of masochism. SE, 19.

309. Freud, S. (1924) The loss of reality in neurosis and psychosis. SE, 19.

310. Freud, S. (1925) Negation. SE, 19.

311. Freud, S. (1925) Some psychical consequences of the anatomical distinction between the sexes. SE, 19.

312. Freud, S. (1926) Inhibitions, symptoms and anxiety. SE, 20.

313. Freud, S. (1926) The question of lay analysis. SE, 20.

314. Freud, S. (1927) Fetishism. SE, 21.

315. Freud, S. (1930) Civilization and its discontents. SE, 21.

316. Freud, S. (1931) Female sexuality. SE, 21.

317. Freud, S. (1931) Libidinal types. SE, 21.

318. Freud, S. (1933) Femininity. SE, 22,.

319. Freud, S. (1933) New introductory lectures on psycho-analysis. SE, 22.

320. Freud, S. (1933) The psychology of women. New introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 22.

321. Freud, S. (1936) A disturbance of memory on the Acropolis. SE, 22.

322. Freud, S. (1937) Analysis terminable and interminable. SE, 23.

323. Freud, S. (1937) Constructions in analysis. SE, 23.

324. Freud, S. (1938) An outline on psychoanalysis. SE, 23.

325. Freud, S. (1938) Splitting of the ego in the process of defense. SE, 23.

326. Freud, S. (1939) Moses and monotheism. SE, 23.

327. Freud, S. (1940) An outline of psychoanalysis. SE, 23.

328. Frosch, J. (1966) A note on reality constancy. In: Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

329. Frosch, J. (1967) Delusional fixity sense of conviction and the psychotic conflict. IJP, 48.

330. Frosch, J. (1977) The relation between acting out and disorders of impulse control. Psychiatry, 40.

331. Frosch, J. (1980) Neurosis and psychosis. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. J. Greenspan & G. H. Pollock. Washington, D. C.: National Institute of Health, vol. 3.

332. Frosch, J. (1983) The Psychotic Process. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

333. Furer, M. (1972) The history of the superego concept in psychoanalysis. In: Moral Value and the Superego concept in Psychoanalysis, ed. S. C. Fost. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

334. Furman, E. (1974) A Child s Parent Dies. New Heaven: Yale Univ. Press.

335. Furman, E. (1980) Transference and externalization. PSOC, 35.

336. Furst, S. Trauma. PMC, Forthcoming.

337. Furst, S. (1967) Psychic trauma. In: Psychic Trauma, ed. S. S. Furst. New York: Basic Books.

338. Furst, S. (1978) The stimulus barrier and the pathogenecity of trauma. IJP, 59.

339. Gaddini, R. (1978) Transitional object and the psychosomatic symptom. In: Grolnich et. al. (1978).

340. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1976) Some suggested revisions concerning early female development. JAPA, 24(5).

341. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1980) The preoedipal development of the boy. JAPA, 28.

342. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1981) Infantile Origins of Sexual Identity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

343. Ganzarain, R. Group psychology. PMC. Forthcoming.

344. Ganzarain, R. (1980) Psychotic-like anxieties and primitive defenses. Issues on Ego Psychology, 3(2).

345. Ganzarain, R. (1988) A comparative study of Bion's concepts about groups. In: Object Relations Group Psychotherapy. Madison, Ct.: Int. Univ. Press.

346. Gediman, H. K. (1971) The concept of the stimulus barrier. IJP, 52.

347. Gedo, J. & Goldberg, A. (1973) Models of the Mind. Chicago & London: Univ. of Chicago Press.

348. Geerts, A. E. & Prechardt, E., reporters (1978) Colloquium on "trauma". IJP, 59.

349. Gero, G. (1943) The idea of psychogenesis in modern psychiatry and in psychoanalysis. Psychoanal. Rev., 30.

350. Gill. M. M. (1963) Topography and Systems in Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, Monogr. 10. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

351. Gill. M. M. (1967) The primary process in motives and thought. In: Motives and Thought, ed. R. R. Holt. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

352. Gill. M. M. (1974) Psychoanalysis and psychotherapy. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 11.

353. Gill, M. M & Rapaport, D. (1942) A case of amnesia and its bearing on the theory of memory. Character and Personality, 11.

354. Gillespie, W. (1956) The general theory of Sexual perversion. IJP, 37.

355. Glenn, J. (in press) A parameter. In: Annu. Psychoanal.

356. Glenn, J. & Kaplan, E. H. (1968) Types of orgasm in women. JAPA, 16.

357. Glower, E. (1929) The "screening" function of traumatic memories. IJP, 4.

358. Glower, E. (1931) Sublimation, substitution, and social anxiety. IJP, 12.

359. Glower, E. (1933) The relation of perversion-formation to the development of reality sense. IJP, 14.

360. Glower, E. (1955) The terminal phase. In: The Technique of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

361. Goldberg, A. (1975) The evolution of psychoanalytic concepts of depression. In: Depression and Human Existence, ed. E. J. Anthony & T. Benedeck. Boston: Little, Brown.

362. Goldberg, A. ed. (1978) The Psychology of the Self. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

363. Goldberg, A. (1983) Self psychology and alternate perspectives on internalization. In: Reflections on Self Psychology, ed. J. Lichtenberg & S. Kaplan. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.

364. Green, A. (1978) Potential space in Psychoanalysis. In: Grolnich et. al. (1978).

365. Greenacre, P. (1949) A contribution to the study of screen memories. FSOC, 3/4.

366. Greenacre, P. (1950) General problems of acting out. PQ, 19.

367. Greenacre, P. (1950) Special problems of early female sexual development. In: Trauma, Growth and Personality New York: Int. Univ. Press.

368. Greenacre, P. (1952) Pregenital patterning. IJP, 33.

369. Greenacre, P. (1953) Penis awe and its relation to penis envy. In: Drives, Affects, Behavior, ed. R. M. Loewenstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

370. Greenacre, P. (1956) Experiences of awe in childhood. PSOC,11.

371. Greenacre, P. (1957) The childhood of the artist. PSOC, 12.

372. Greenacre, P. (1958) The family romance of the artist. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1971, vol. 2.

373. Greenacre, P. (1958) The relation of the impostor to the artist. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1971, vol. 1.

374. Greenacre, P. (1968) Perversions. PSOC, 23.

375. Greenacre, P. (1969) The fetish and the transitional object, part 1. PSOC, 24.

376. Greenacre, P. (1970) The fetish and the transitional object, part 2. IJP 51, vol. 4.

377. Greenacre, P. (1970) The transitional object and the fetish. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

378. Greenacre, P. (1972) Crowds and crisis. PSOC, 27.

379. Greenacre, P. (1973) The primal scene and the sense of reality. PQ, 42.

380. Greenacre, P. (1975) On reconstruction. JAPA, 21.

381. Greenberg, J. R. & Mitchell, S. A. (1983) Object Relations in Psychoanalytic Theory. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.

382. Greenson, R. R. (1949) The psychology of apathy. PQ, 18.

383. Greenson, R. R. (1953) On boredom. JAPA, 1.

384. Greenson, R. R. (1960) Empathy and its vicissitudes. IJP, 41.

385. Greenson, R. R. (1962) On enthusiasm. JAPA, 10.

386. Greenson, R. R. (1965) The working alliance and the transference neurosis. PQ, 34.

387. Greenson, R. R. (1967) The technique and Practice of Psycho-analysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

388. Greenson, R. R. (1978) Exploration in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

389. Greenspan, S. & Pollock, G., eds. (1980) The Course of Life. Vol. I. Washington, D. C.: U. S. Government Printing office.

390. Grinberg, L., Sor, D. & Tabak de Bianchedi, E. (1975) Introduction to the Work of Bion, trans. A. Hahn. Scotland: Clunie Press.

391. Grinker, E. R (1945) Psychiatric disorders in combat crews overseas and in returnees. Med. Clin. North. Amer., 29.

392. Grinstein, A. (1983) Freud's Rules of Dream Interpretation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

393. Grolnick, S., Barkin, L. & Muensterberger, W., eds. (1978) Between Reality and Fantasy. New York: Jason Aronson.

394. Grosskurth, P. (1986) Melanie Klein. New York: Alfred Knopf.

395. Grossman, W. E. & Stewart, W. A. (1976) Penis envy. JAPA, 24 (5).

396. Grotstein, J. S. (1981) Splitting and Projective Indentification. New York: Jason Aronson.

397. Guntrip, H. (1961) Personality Structure and Human Interaction. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

398. Guntrip, H. (1968) Schizoid Phenomena, Object-Relations and the Self. London: Hogarth Press.

399. Harley, M. (1967) Transference developments in a five-year old child. In: the Child Analyst at Work, ed. E. Geleerd. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

400. Harley, M. (1974) Analyst and Adolescent at Work. New York: Quadrangle.

401. Harley, M. (1986) Child analysis, 1947—1984, a retrospective. PSOC, 41.

402. Harre, R. and Lamb, R. (1983) The Encyclopedia Dictionary of Psychology. Cambridge: M. I. T. Press.

403. Harrison, J. B. (1975) On the maternal origins of awe. PSOC, 30.

404. Harrison, J. B. (1979) On Freud's view of the infant-mother relationship and of the oceanic feeling. JAPA, 27.

405. Harrison, S. J. (1970) Is psychoanalysis "our science?". JAPA, 18.

406. Hartmann, H. PSOC, 5.

407. Hartmann, H. (1937) Ego Psychology and the Problem of Adaptation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

408. Hartmann, H. (1939) Ego Psychology and the Problem of Adaptation. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1958.

409. Hartmann, H. (1939) Psychoanalysis and the concept of health. In: Hartmann (1964).

410. Hartmann, H. (1947) On rational and irrational action. In: Essays on Ego Psychology. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1964.

411. Hartmann, H. (1948) Comments on the theory of instinctual drives. PQ, 17.

412. Hartmann, H. (1950) Comments on the psychoanalytic theory of the ego. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

413. Hartmann, H. (1951) Technical implications of ego psychology PQ, 20.

414. Hartmann, H. (1952) The mutual influences in the development of ego and id. PSOC, 7.

415. Hartmann, H. (1953) Contribution to the metapsychology of schizophrenia. In: Hartmann, PSOC, 8.

416. Hartmann, H. (1953) The metapsychology of schizophrenia. PSOC, 8.

417. Hartmann, H. (1955) Notes on the theory of sublimation. PSOC, 10.

418. Hartmann, H. (1956) The development of the ego concept in Freud's work. IJP, 37.

419. Hartmann, H. (1964) Essays in Ego Psychology. New York Int. Univ. Press.

420. Hartmann, H. (1964) The development of the ego concept in Freud's work. IJP, 37.

421. Hartmann, H., Kris, E. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1946) Comments in the formation of psychic structure. PSOC, 2.

422. Hartmann, H., Kris, E. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1949) Notes on the theory of aggression. PSOC, 3/4.

423. Hartmann, H. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1962) Notes on the superego. PSOC, 17.

424. Hassler, A. D. (1960) Guideposts of migrating fish. Science, 122.

425. Hastings, D. W. (1963) Impotence and Frigidity. Boston: Little, Brown.

426. Heimann, P. (1952) Certain functions of introjection and projection in early infancy. In: Klein et al. (1952).

427. Heimann, P. & Valenstein, A. F. (1962) Notes on the anal stage IJP, 43.

428. Heimann, P. & Valenstein, A. F. (1972) The psychoanalytical concept of aggression. IJP, 53.

429. Hendrick, I. (1958) Facts and Theories of Psychoanalysis, 3rd ed. New York: Alfred Knopf.

430. Hill, M. (1982) Analysis of transference. In: Theory and Technique, vol. 1. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

431. Hoffer, W. (1949) Mouth, hand, and ego integration. PSOC, 3/4.

432. Holder, A. (1982) Preoedipal contributions to the formation of the superego. PSOC, 37.

433. Holt, R. R. (1964) The emergence of cognitive psychology JAPA, 12.

434. Holt, R. R. (1967) Beyond vitalism and mechanism. In: Science and Psychoanalysis, ed. J. H. Masserman. Hew York: Grune & Stratton, vol. 2.

435. Hook, S. (1959) Psychoanalysis, Scientific Method and Philosophy. New York: Grove Press.

436. Horney, K. (1924) On the genesis of the castration complex in women. IJP, 5.

437. Horney, K. (1926) The flight from womanhood. IJP, 7.

438. Horowitz, M. J. (1972) Modes of representation of thought. JAFA, 20.

439. Horowitz, M. J. (1979) States of Mind, 2d. ed. New York: Plenum, 1987, chap. 3.

440. Hurvich, M. (1970) On the concept of reality testing. IJP, 51.

441. Isaacs, S. (1952) The nature and function of phantasy. In: Klein et. al. (1952).

442. Isakower, O. (1938) A contribution to the pathopsychology of phenomena associated with falling asleep. IJP, 19.

443. Isakower, O. (1963) Minutes of the faculty meeting. New York Psychoanalytic Institute, Oct. 14—Nov. 20. A. Z. Pteffer, reporter.

444. Isay, R. A. (1986) Homosexuality in homosexual and heterosexual men. In: The Psychology of Men, ed. G. Fogel, F. Lane & R. Liebert. New York: Basic Books.

445. Jacobi, J. (1959) Complex (Archetype) Symbol in the Work of C. G. Jung. Princeton, N. J.: Princeton Univ. Press.

446. Jacobs, T. J. (1986) Transference relationships, relationships between transferences and reconstruction. In: Psycho-analysis, the Science of Mental Conflict, ed. A. D. Richards & M. S. Willick. Hillsdale N. J.: Analytic Press.

447. Jacobson, E. (1953) Contribution to the metapsychology of cyclothymic depression. In: Affective Disorders, ed. P. Greenacre. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

448. Jacobson, E. (1954) Contribution to the metapsychology of psychotic identifications. JAPA, 2.

449. Jacobson, E. (1957) Normal and pathological moods. PSOC, 12.

450. Jacobson, E. (1959) Depersonalization. JAPA, 7.

451. Jacobson, E. (1964) The Self and the Object World. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

452. Jacobson, E. (1967) Psychotic Conflict and Reality. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

453. Jacobson, E. (1971) Depression. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

454. Jacobson, E. (1971) Depression: Comparative Studies of Normal, Neurotic and Psychotic Conditions. Madison, Conn.: Int. Univ. Press.

455. Jacobson, E. (1971) Normal and pathological moods. In: Depression. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

456. Jacobson, E. (1975) The regulation of self-esteem. In: Depression and Human Existence. ed. E. J. Anthony & T. Benedeck. Boston: Little, Brown.

457. Jaffe, A. (1971) The Myth of Meaning. New York: Putnam.

458. Jaffe, D. S. (1970) Forgetting and remembering. P. Q, 39.

459. Janet, Dr. Pierre (1924) Principles of Psychotherapy. New York: Macmillan.

460. John, E. R. (1976) A model of consciousness. In: Consciousness and Self-Regulation, ed. G. E. Schwartz & D. Shapiro. New York: Plenum Press, 1976, vol. 1.

461. Jones, E. (1908) Rationalization in everyday life J Abnorm. Psychol., 3: 161—169.

462. Jones, E. (1918) Anal-erotic character traits. In: Papers on Psychoanalysis London— Balliere Tindall & Cox, 1948.

463. Jones, E. (1931) The concept of a normal mind. In: Papers on Psychoanalysis, 5th ed., London. Bailliйre, Tindall & Cox, 1948.

464. Jones, E. (1933) The phallic phase. IJP, 14.

465. Jones, E. (1934) Editorial preface to the Collected Papers of Sigmund Freud, 4. London— Hogarth Press.

466. Jones, E. (1941) Evolution and revolution. IJP, 22.

467. Jones, E. (1949) Hamlet and Oedipus. New York: Norton.

468. Jones, E. (1957) The life and work of Sigmund Freud, vol. 3. New York: Basic Books.

469. Joseph, E. D. (1965) Regressive Ego Phenomena in Psychoanalysis. Monograph I, Kris Study Group. New York Int. Univ. Press.

470. Joseph, E. D. (1966) Memory and conflict. PQ, 35.

471. Joseph, E. D. & Wallerstein, R. S (1982) Psychotherapy. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

472. Jung, C. G. (1921—57) Collected Works of C. G. Jung Princeton, N. J.: Princeton Univ. Press.

473. Jung, C. G. (1938) Psychological aspects of the mother archetype. In: Collected Works, vol. 9, pt. 1.

474. Jung, C. G. (1957) Animus and Anima. Zurich: Spring.

475. Jung, C. G. (1963) Memories Dreams, Reflections. New York Pantheon.

476. Kamyer, M. (1985) Identification and its vicissitudes. IJP, 66.

477. Kandell, E (1976) Cellular Basis of Behavior. San Francisco— W H. Freeman.

478. Kanzer, M. (1948) The passing of the Oedipus complex' in Greek drama. IJP, 29.

479. Kanzer, M. (1964) On interpreting the Oedipus plays Psychoanal Study Society, 3.

480. Kanzer, M. (1981) Freud's "analytic pact". JAPA, 29.

481. Kardiner, A. (1941) The Traumatic Neurosis of War New. York: Hoeber.

482. Karma, L. (1981) A clinical report of penis envy. JAPA, 29.

483. Karush, A., Daniels, C. E., Flood, C. & O'Connor, J. F. (1977) Psychotherapy in Chronic Ulcerative Colitis. Philadelphia: Sannders.

484. Katan, A. (1972) The infant's first reaction to strangers. IJP, 53.

485. Katan, M. (1940) The role of the word in mania. Bull. Phi la. Assn. Psychoanal., 22.

486. Katz, J. (1963) On primary gain and secondary gain. PSOC, 18.

487. Katz, J. (1985) Book review of Melanie Klein by Hanna Segal. New York: Viking Press. 1980 JAPA, 33 (suppl.).

488. Kaywin, L. (1966) Problems of sublimation. JAPA, 14.

489. Kernberg, O. F. (1966) Structural derivations of object relationships. IJP, 47.

490. Kernberg, O. F. (1967) Borderline personality organization. JAPA, 15.

491. Kernberg, O. F. (1975) Borderline Conditions and Pathological Narcissism. New York: Jason Aronson.

492. Kernberg, O. F. (1976) Object Relations Theory and Clinical Psychoanalysis. New York: Jason Aronson.

493. Kernberg, O. F. (1977) Boundaries and structure in love relations. JAPA, 25.

494. Kernberg, O. F. (1980) Fairbairn's theory and challenge. In: Internal World and External Reality: Object Relations Theory Applied. New York: Jason Aronson.

495. Kernberg, O. F. (1980) Internal World and External Reality. New York: Jason Aronson.

496. Kernberg, O. F. (1984) Severe Personality Disorders. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.

497. Kessler, J. W. (1970) Contributions of the mentally retarded toward a theory of cognitive development. In: Cognitive Studies, ed. J. Hellmuth. New York Brunner/Mazel.

498. Kestenberg, J. S. (1967) Phases of adolescence. J. Amer. Acad. Child. Psychiat., 6.

499. Khan, M. (1982) Introduction. In: D. W. Winnicott, Through Paediatrics to Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.

500. Klein, G. S. (1966) The several grades of memory. In: Psychoanalysis. A General Psychology, pd. H. M. Lowenstein, L M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York Int. Univ. Press.

501. Klein, M. (1932) The Psychoanalysis of Children London: Hogarth Press.

502. Klein, M. (1946) Notes on some schizoid mechanisms IJP, 27.

503. Klein, M. (1948) Contributions to Psychoanalysis, 1921—45. London: Hogarth Press.

504. Klein, M. (1950) Narrative of a Child Analysis. New York Basic Books.

505. Klein, M. (1957) Envy and Gratitude. New York: Basic Books.

506. Klein, M. (1957) On identification. In: New Directions in Psychoanalysis, ed. M. Klein, P. Heimann & R. Money-Kyrle. New York: Basic Books.

507. Klein, M. (1959) On the development of Mental functioning. In: Envy and Gratitude London: Delacorte Press, 1975.

508. Klein, M., Heimann, P., Isaacs, S. & Riviere J. (eds.) (1952) Developments in Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.

509. Knight, R. P. (1953) Borderline states. Bull. Menn. Clin., 17.

510. Knight, R. P. (1972) Clinician and Therapist: Selected Papers of Robert P. Knight, ed. Stuart C. Miller. New York: Basic Books.

511. Kohut, H. (1959) Introspection, empathy, and psycho-analysis. JAPA, 7.

512. Kohut, H. (1971) The Analysis of the Self. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

513. Kohut, H. (1977) The Restoration of the Self. New York Int. Univ. Press.

514. Kohut, H. (1978) The Search for the Self, ed. P. Ornstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

515. Kohut, H. (1984) How Does Analysis Cure? ed. A Goldben & P. Stepansky. Chicago: Univ. Chicago Press.

516. Kohut, H. & Wolf, E. S. (1978) The disorders of the self and their treatment. IJP, 59.

517. Krapf, E. E. (1961) The concept of normality and mental, health in psychoanalysis. IJP, 59.

518. Kreisler, L. (1984) Fundamentals for a psychosomatic pathology of infants. In: Frontiers of Infant Psychiatry, ed. J. D. Call, E. Galenson & R. L. Tyson. New York: Basic Books, vol. 2.

519. Kris, A. O. (1982) Free Association. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.

520. Kris, A. O. (1984) The conflicts of ambivalence. PSOC, 39.

521. Kris, E. (1951) Ego psychology and interpretation in psychoanalytic therapy. P. Q, 20.

522. Kris, E. (1952) Psychoanalytic Exploration in Art. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

523. Kris, E. (1956) On some vicissitudes of insight in psychoanalysis. IJP, 37.

524. Kris, E. (1956) The personal myth. JAPA, 4.

525. Kris, E. (1956) The recovery of childhood memories in psychoanalysis. PSOC, 11.

526. Krupuick, J. L. & Horowitz, M. J. (1981) Stress response syndromes. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 38.

527. Krystal, H. ed. (1968) Massive Psychic Trauma. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

528. Krystal, H. (1978) Trauma and affects. PSOC, 33.

529. Krystal, H. (1981) The hedonic element in affectivity. J. Psychoanal., 9.

530. Krystal, H. (1982) Alexithymia and the affectiveness of psychoanalytic treatment. Int. J. Psychoanal. Psychother., 9.

531. Kubie, L. S. (1947) The fallacious use of quantitative concepts in dynamic psychology. P. Q, 16.

532. Kubie, L. S. (1962) The fallacious misuse of the concept of sublimation. PQ, 31.

533. Kubie, L. S. (1972) Personal communication.

534. Kubie, L. S. (1975) The language tools of psychoanalysis. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 2.

535. Labov, W. (1972) Language in the Inner City. Philadelphia: Univ. Penn. Press.

536. Lagache, D. (1953) Behavior and psychoanalytic experience In Drives. Affects, Behavior, ed. R. Loewenstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

537. Langer, S. K. (1962) Problems and techniques of psychoanalytic validation and progress. In: Psychoanalysis as Science, ed. E. Pumplan-Mindlin. Stanford: Stanford Univ. Press.

538. Langer, W. (1958) The next assignment. Amer. Imago, 15.

539. Langhlin, H. P. (1967) The Neurosis. Washington: Butterworth.

540. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1967) Vocabulaire de la Psychoanalyse. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.

541. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1973) The Language of Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.

542. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1983) The Language of psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.

543. Laseque, C. (1977) Les exhibitionnistes. L'Union Medicale, Froisieme Serie, 23.

544. Leaff, L. A. (1971) Affect versus feeling. JAPA, 19.

545. Leon, I. G. (1984) Psychoanalysis, Piaget and attachment. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 11.

546. Lerner, H. E. (1976) Parental Mislabeling of female genitals as a determinant of penis envy and learning inhibitions in women. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).

547. Levey, M. (1985) The concept structure in psychoanalysis. Annu. Psychoanal. 12—13.

548. Levy, D. (1983) Wittgenstein on the form of psychoanalytic interpretation. Int. Rev. Psycho-anal., 10.

549. Levy, S. T. (1984) Principles of Interpretaion. New York: Aronson.

550. Levy, S. T. (1984) Psychoanalytic perspectives on emptiness. JAPA, 32.

551. Levy, S. T. (1985) Empathy and psychoanalytic technique. JAPA, 33.

552. Lewin, B. D. (1933) The body as phallus. PQ, 2.

553. Lewin, B. D. (1946) Sleep, the mouth, and the dream screen. PQ, 15.

554. Lewin, B. D. (1950) The Psychoanalysis of Elation. New York: Norton.

555. Lewin, B. D. (1953) Reconslde ration of the dream screen. PQ, 22.

556. Lewis, H. B. (1971) Shame and Guilt in Neurosis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

557. Lichtenberg, J., Bornstein, M. & Silver, D., eds. (1984) Empathy, vols. 1—2. Hillsdale & London: Analytic Press.

558. Lichtenberg, J. D. & Kaplan, S. (1983) Reflections on Self Psychology. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.

559. Lichtenberg, J. D. & Slap, J. W. (1973) Notes on the concept of splitting and defense mechanism of splitting of representations. JAPA, 21.

560. Lichtenstein, H. (1961) Identity and sexuality. JAPA, 9.

561. Lichtenstein, H. (1970) Changing implications of the concept of psychosexual development. JAPA, 18.

562. Lidz, T., Fleck, S. & Cornelison. A. R. (1965) Schizophrenia and the Family. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

563. Lifschutz, J. E. (1976) A critique of reporting and assessment in the training analysis. JAPA, 24.

564. Limentani, A. (1979) The significance of transsexualism in relation to some basic psychoanalytic concepts. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 6.

565. Loewald, H. W. (1951) Ego and reality. IJP, 32.

566. Loewald, H. W. (1959) The waning of the Oedipus complex. JAPA, 27.

567. Loewald, H. W. (1962) Internalization, separation, mourning, and the superego. PQ, 31.

568. Loewald, H. W. (1971) Some considerations on repetition and repetition compulsion. IJP, 52.

569. Loewald, H. W. (1973) On internalization. IJP, 54.

570. Loewenstein, R. M. (1951—72) Practice and Precept in Psycho analytic Technique. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press, 1982.

571. Loewenstein, R. M. (1951) The problem of interpretation. PQ, 20.

572. Loewenstein, R. M. (1957) A contribution to the psychoanalytic theory of masochism. JAPA, 5.

573. Loewenstein, R. M., Newman, L. M., Schur, M. & Solnit, A. J., eds. (1966) Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

574. Lorand, S. (1950) Clinical Studies in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

575. Lowinger, J. (1976) Ego Development. San Francisco: Jossey Bass.

576. Luria, A. R. (1978) The human brain and conscious activity. In: Consciousness and Self-Regulation, ed. G. E. Shwarta & D. Shapiro. New York: Plenum Press, 1978, vol. 2.

577. Lustman, J. (1977) On splitting. PSOC, 32.

578. Lynd, H. M. (1961) On Shame and the Search for Identity New York: Science Editions.

579. Madow, Z. & Snow, L. H., eds. (1970) The Psychodynamic Implications of the Physiological Studies on Dreams. Springfield, III: Thomas.

580. Mahler, M. S. (1952) On child psychosis and schizophrenia. PSOC, 7.

581. Mahler, M. S. (1963) Thoughts and development and individuation. PSOC. 12.

582. Mahler, M. S. (1966) Notes on the development of basic moods: the depressive affect in psychoanalysis. In: Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schuz & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

583. Mahler, M. S. (1968) On Human Symbiosis and the Vicissitudes of Individuation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

584. Mahler, M. S. (1975) Discussion on Bernard L. Pacella's paper. JAPA, 23.

585. Mahler, M. S. (1975) On the current status of infantile neurosis. JAPA, 23.

586. Mahler, M. S. (1979) Selected Papers of Margaret S. Mahler, vol. 2. New York: Jason Aronson.

587. Mahler, M. S. & Purer, M. (1968) On Human Symbiosis and the Vicissitudes of Individuation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

588. Mahler, M. S. & Gosliner, B. J. (1955) On Symbiotic child psychosis. PSOC, 10.

589. Mahler, M. S., Pine, F. & Bergman, A. (1975) The Psychological Birth of the Human Infant. New York: Basic Books.

590. Mahony, P. (1979) The boundaries of free association. Psychoanal. Contemp. Thought, 2.

591. Malcove, L. (1975) The analytic situation (and Panel discussion). J. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 2.

592. Marcovitz, E. (1973) On confidentiality in psychoanalysis. Bull. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 23.

593. Marcus, I. M. & Francis, J. J. (1975) Masturbation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

594. Marty, P. & de M'Uzan, M. (1963) La pensйe opйratoire. Rev. Psychoanaltique, 27 suppl.

595. Masson, J. M. (1980) The Oceanic Feeling. Boston: D. Reidel Publishing Company.

596. Masters, W. H. & Johnson, V. E. (1966) Human Sexual Response. Boston: Little, Brown.

597. McDaugall, J. (1984) The "dis-affected" patient. PQ, 53.

598. McDevitt, J. B. (1975) Separation-individuation and object constancy. JAPA, 23.

599. Meehl, P. E. (1962) Hedonic capacity. Bull. Menn. Clin., 39.

600. Meissner, W. H. (1978) The Paranoid Process. New York: Aronson.

601. Meissner, W. W. (1979) Internalization and object relations. JAPA, 27.

602. Meissner, W. W. (1981) Internalization in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

603. Meissner, W. W. (1981) Metapsychology: who needs it. JAPA, 29.

604. Meissner, W. W., Mack, J. E. & Semrad, E. V. (1975) Classical Psychoanalysis. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. A. M. Freedman, H. I. Kaplan & J. Sadock. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.

605. Menninger, W. (1943) Characterologic and symptomatic expressions related to the anal phase of psycho sexual development. PQ, 12.

606. Mesmer, Franz Anton (1965) The Nature of Hypnosis, ed. Ronald E. Shor and Martin T. Orne. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.

607. Metcalf, D. & Spitz, R. A. (1978) The transitional object. In: Grolnick et al. (1978).

608. Meyer, B. C. (1972) The contribution of psychoanalysis to biography. Psychoanal. Contemp. Sci., 1.

609. Meyer, J. (1982) The theory of gender identity disorders. JAPA, 30.

610. Meyer, J. (1985) Ego-dystonic homosexuality. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, 4th ed., ed. H. Kaplan & B. Sadock. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.

611. Meyer, J. (1985) Paraphilia. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. H. Kaplan & B. Sadock. Baltimore, Williams & Wilkins, 4th ed.

612. Michaels, R. & Gaeger, R. K. Adaptation. PMC. Forthcoming.

613. Milrod, D. (1982) The wished-for-self-image. PSOC, 37.

614. Modell, A. H. (1958) The Theoretical implications of hallucinatory experiences in schizophrenia. JAFA, 6.

615. Modell, A. H. (1965) Object Love and Reality. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

616. Modell, A. H. (1970) The transitional object and the creative act. PQ, 39.

617. Modell, A. H. (1975) The ego and the id. IJP, 56.

618. Money, J. & Green, R. (1969) Transsexualism and Sex Reassignment. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Univ. Press.

619. Monroe, R. R (1970) Episodic Behavior Disorders. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.

620. Moore, B. E. (164) Frigidity. PQ. 33.

621. Moore, B. E. (1975) Freud and female sexuality. IJP, 57.

622. Moore, B. E. (1975) Toward a clarification on the concept of narcissism. PSOC, 30.

623. Moore, B. E. (1976) Freud and female sexuality. IJP, 57.

624. Moore, B. E. (1977) Psychic representation and female orgasm. In: Female Psychology, ed. H. P. Blum. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

625. Moore, B. E. & Fine, B. D., eds. (1967) A Glossary of Psychoanalytic Terms and Concepts. New York: Amer. Psychoanal. Assn.

626. Moore, B. E. & Rubinfine, D. Z. (1969) The mechanism of denial. Kris Study Group Monographs, New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 3.

627. Moses, R. (1978) Adult psychic trauma. IJP, 59.

628. Murray, C. D. (1930) Psychogenic factors in the etiology of ulcerative colitis and bloody diarrhea. Amer. J. Med. Sci., 180.

629. Nagera, H., ed. (1966) Early Childhood Disturbances, the Infantile Neurosis, and the Adulthood Disturbances. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

630. Nagera, H. (1967) The concepts of structure and structuralization. PSOC, 22.

631. Nagera, H. (1969—71) Basic Psychoanalytic Concepts. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

632. Nagera, H. (1976) Obsessional Neuroses. New York: Aronson.

633. Natterson, J. M. (1980) The Dream in Clinical Practice. New York: Jason Aronson.

634. Nemiah, J. C. & Sifneos, P. E. (1970) Affect and fantasy in patients with psychosomatic disorders. In: Modern Trends in Psychosomatic Medicine, ed. O. W. Hill. London: Butterworths, vol. 2.

635. Neubaner, P. B. (1979) The role of insight in psychoanalysis JAPA, 27.

636. Neubaner, P. B. (1982) Rivalry, envy, and Jealousy. PSOC, 37.

637. Novick, J. (1982) Varieties of transference in the analysis of an adolescent. IJP, 42.

638. Novick, J. & Kelly, K. (1970) Projection and externalization. PSOC, 25.

639. Noy, P. Wollstein, S. & Kaplan-de-Nour, A. (1966) Clinical observations of the psychogenesis of impotence. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 39.

640. Nunberg, H. (1948) The synthetic function of the ego. In: Practice and Theory of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 1.

641. Nunberg, H. (1954) Evaluation of the results of psychoanalytic treatment. IJP, 35.

642. Nunberg, H. (1955) Principles of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

643. Ogden, T. (1982) Projective Identification and Psycho-therapeutic Technique. New York: Jason Aronson.

644. Olinick, S. Z. (1964) The negative therapeutic reaction. IJP, 45.

645. Olinick, S. Z. (1980) The Psychotheraputic Instrument. New York: Jason Aronson.

646. Ornston, D. G. (1978) On projection. PSOC, 33.

647. Ornston, D. G. (1982) Strachey's influence. IJP, 63.

648. Ornston, D. G. (1985a) Freud's conception is different from Strachey's. JAPA, 33.

649. Ornston, D. G. (1985b) The invention of "cathexes" and Strachey's strategy. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 12.

650. Ornston, D. G. (1988) How standard is the "Standard Edition? In Freud in Exile, ed. E. Timns & N. Segal. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.

651. Orr, D. W. (1954) Transference and countertransference. JAPA, 2.

652. Ostow, M. (1974) Sexual Deviation. New York: Quadrangle.

653. Pacella, B. (1975) Early ego development and the deja vu. JAPA, 23.

654. Panel (1957) Acting out and its relation to impulse disorders. M. Kanzer, reporter. JAPA, 5.

655. Panel (1958) Problems of identity. D. Z. Rubinfine, reporter. JAPA, 6.

656. Panel (1958) Technical aspects of regression during psychoanalysis. K. T. Calder, reporter. JAFA, 11.

657. Panel (1963) The concept of the id. E. Marcovitz, reporter. JAPA, 11.

658. Panel (1964) Depersonalization. W. A. Stewart, reporter. JAPA, 12.,.

659. Panel (1966) Clinical and theoretical aspects of "as-if" characters. J. Weiss, reporter. JAPA, 11.

660. Panel (1969) The theory of genital primacy in the light of ego psychology. M. Berezin, reporter. JAPA, 17.

661. Panel (1971) Action, acting out, and the symptomatic act. N. Actins, reporter. JAPA, 18.

662. Panel (1970) Psychoanalytic theory of affects. L. B. Lofgren, reporter. JAPA, 16.

663. Panel (1970) The development of the child's sense of his sexual identity. Virginia, L. Glower, reporter. JAPA, 18.

664. Panel (1970) The negative therapeutic reaction. S. L. Olinick, reporter. JAPA, 18.

665. Panel (1972) Levels of confidentiality in the psychoanalytic situation. A. S. Watson, reporter JAPA, 20.

666. Panel (1974) Toward a theory of affects. P. Castelneuvo-Tedesco, reporter. JAPA, 22. W.

667. Panel (1975) The analytic situation. S. T. Shapiro, reporter. J. Phila. Aasn. Psychoanal.,2.

668. Panel (1980) New directions in affect theory. E. P. Lester, reporter. JAPA, 30.

669. Panel (1981) Insight. K. H. Blacker, reporter. JAPA, 29.

670. Panel (1981) Masochism. W. Fischer, reporter. JAPA, 29.

671. Panel (1982) Beyond lay analysis. H. Fischer, reporter. JAPA, 30.

672. Panel (1983) Clinical aspects of character. M. Willick, reporter. JAPA, 31.

673. Panel (1983) Theory of character. S. M. Abend, reporter. JAPA, 31.

674. Panel (1984) The neutrality of the analyst in the analytic situation, R. J. Leider, reporter. JAPA, 32. (1985) Perspectives on the nature of psychic reality. E. Roughton, reporter. JAPA, 33.

675. Panel (1987) Toward the further understanding of homosexual women. A Wolfson, reporter. JAPA, 35.

676. Pao, P.-N. (1971) Elation, hypomania and mania. JAFA, 19.

677. Parens, H. (1979) The Development of Aggression in Early Childhood. New York: Jason Aronson.

678. Parens, H. (1980) Psychic development during the second and third years of life. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. Greenspan & G. Pollock. Washington: Nat. Inst. Health.

679. Parens, H. & Saul, L. J. (1971) Dependence in Man. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

680. Person, E. & Ovesey, L. (1974) The transsexual syndrome in males. Amer. J. Psychother., 28.

681. Person, E. & Ovesey, L. (1983) Psychoanalytic theories of gender identity. J. Amer. Acad. Psychoanal., 2.

682. Peterfreund, E. & Schwartz, J. T. (1971) Information, systems, and Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

683. Peto, A. (1976) The etiological significance of the primal scene in perversions. PQ, 44.

684. Pfeffer, A. Z. (1984) Modes of obsessional thinking. Presented at the New York Psychoanalytic Society, October 23.

685. Piaget, J. (1937) The Construction of Reality in the Child. New York: Basic Books, 1954.

686. Piaget, J. (1962) Play, Dreams and Imitation in Childhood New York: Norton.

687. Piers, G. & Singer, M. B. (1953) Shame and Guilt. Springfield: Thomas; New ed., New York: Norton.

688. Pine, F. (1985) Developmental Theory and Clinical Process. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.

689. Poland, W. S. (1984) On the analyst's neutrality. JAFA, 32.

690. Pollock, G. H. (1961) Mourning and adaptation. IJP, 42.

691. Pollock, G. H. (1978) Process and affect. IJP, 59.

692. Potamianau, A. (1985) The personal myth. PSOC, 40.

693. Provence, S. & Lipton, R. (1962) Infants in Institutions. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

694. Pulver, S. E. Symptomatology. PMC. Forthcoming.

695. Pulver, S. E. (1970) Narcissism. JAPA, 18.

696. Rado, S. (1949) An adaptational view of sexual behavior In Psychosexual Development in Health and Disease, ed. P. H. Hock & J. Lubin. New York: Grune & Stratton.

697. Rangell, L. Affects. PMC. Forthcoming.

698. Rangell, L. (1959) The nature of conversion. JAPA, 7.

699. Rangell, L. (1963) Structural problems in intrapsychic conflict. PSOC, 18.

700. Rangell, L. (1966) An overview of the ending of an analysis. In: Psychoanalysis in Americas, ed. R. E. Litman. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

701. Rangell, L. (1968) A point of view on acting out. IJP, 49.

702. Rangell, L. (1981) From insight to change. JAPA, 29.

703. Rangell, L. (1981) Psychoanalysis and dynamic psychotherapy. PQ, 50.

704. Rangell, L. (1983) Defense and resistance in psychoanalysis and life. JAPA, 31 (suppl.).

705. Rangell, L. (1985) The object in psychoanalytic theory. JAPA, 33.

706. Rank, O. (1909) The Myth of the Birth of the Hero. New York: Nerv. Ment. Dis. Monogr., 18.

707. Rank, O. (1924) The Trauma of Birth. New York: Robert Brunner, 1952.

708. Rapaport, D. (1942) Emotions and Memory. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1950.

709. Rapaport, D. (1960) The structure of Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, monogr. 6, New York: Int. Univ. Press.

710. Rapaport, D. & Gill, M. M. (1959) The points of view and assumptions of metapsychology. In: The Collected Papers of David Rapaport. New York: Basic Books, 1967.

711. Rapoport, A. (1955) The role of symbols in human behavior. Psychiatric Research Reports, vol. 2, ed. J. S. Gottlieb et al. Washington: Amer. Psychiat. Assn.

712. Rappaport, E. A. (1968) Beyond traumatic neurosis. IJP, 49.

713. Reich, A. (1951) On countertransference. In: Psychoanalytic Contributions. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1973.

714. Reich, A. (1953) Narcissistic object choice in women. JAPA, 1.

715. Reich, A. (1954) Early identifications as archaic elements in the superego. JAPA, 2.

716. Reich, A. (1960) Pathologic forms of self-esteem regulation. PSOC, 15.

717. Reich, W. (1933) Character Analysis. New York: Orgone Press, 1949.

718. Reich, W. (1933) Some circumscribed character forms. In: Character Analysis. New York: Orgone Institute Press.

719. Reik, T. (1919) Ritual. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

720. Reiser, M. (1984) Mind, Brain and Body New York: Basic Books.

721. Richards, A. D. (1985) Isakower-like experience on the couch. PQ. 54.

722. Ricoeur, P. (1970) Freud and Philosophy. New Haven — Yale Univ. Press.

723. Ricoeur, P. (1976) Interpretation Theory. Forth Worth-Texas Christian Univ. Press.

724. Rinsley, D. B. (1982) Fairbairn's object relations and classical concepts of dynamics and structure. In: Borderline and Other Self Disorders' A Developmental and Object-Relations Respective New York: Jason Aronson.

725. Rioch, M. (1970) The work of W. R Bion on groups. Psychiatry, 33.

726. Ritvo, S. (1971) Late adolescence. PSOC, 18.

727. Ritvo, S. (1974) Current status of the concept of infantile neurosis. PSOC, 29.

728. Robbins, F & Sadow, L (1974) A developmental hypothesis of reality processing. JAPA, 22.

729. Rodman, F. R. (1987) Introduction In the Spontaneous Gesture — Selected Letters of D. W. Winnicott, ed. F. R. Rodman Cambridge—Harvard Univ. Press.

730. Roiphe, H. (1968) On an early genital phase. PSOC, 23.

731. Roiphe, H. & Galenson, E. (1981) Infantile Roots of Sexual Identity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

732. Rose, G. (1978) The creativity of everyday life. In: Grolnick et al (1978).

733. Rose, H. (1928) A Handbook of Greek Mythology. London: Methuen.

734. Rosenblatt, A. D. & Thickstun, J T. (1970) A study of the concept of psychic energy. IJP, 51.

735. Rosenthal, S. M. (1968) The involutional depressive syndrome. Amer J. Psychiat., 124.

736. Ross, N. (1967) The "as-if" concept. JAPA, 15.

737. Ross, N. (1970) The primacy of genitality in the light of ego psychology. JAPA, 18.

738. Rothstein, A. (1983) The Structural Hypothesis. New York: Int., Univ. Press.

739. Roughton, R. Action and acting out. FMC. Forthcoming.

740. Rubinstein, B. B. (1972) On metaphor and related phenomena. In: Psychoanalysis and Contemporary Science, ed. A. R. Holt & E. Peterfreund., New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 1.

741. Rutter, M. (1972) Maternal Deprivation. Baltimore: Penguin Books.

742. Rycroft, C. (1968) A critical Dictionary of Psychoanalysis New York: Basic Books.

743. Sachs, D. M. (1979) On the relationship between psycho-analysis and psychoanalytic psychotherapy. Bull. Phila Assn. Psychoanal, 6.

744. Sachs, H. (1942) The Creative Unconscious Cambridge, Mass.: Sci. Art. Publishers.

745. Samuels, A. (1985) Jung and the Post-Jungians London — Routledge & Kegan Paul.

746. Sandler, J. (1960) On the concept of the superego. PSOC, 15.

747. Sandler, J., Dare, C. & Holder, A (1973) The negative therapeutic reaction. In: The Patient and the Analyst New York: Int. Univ. Press.

748. Sandler, J. & Freud, A. (1985) The Analysis of Defense. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

749. Sandler, J., Hodler, A. & Meers, D. (1963) The ego ideal and the ideal self. PSOC, 18.

750. Sandler, J., Kennedy, H & Tyson, R. L (1980) The Technique of Child Psychoanalysis. Cambridge—Harvard Univ. Press.

751. Sandler, J. & Rosenblatt, B. (1962) The concept of the representational world. PSOC, 17.

752. Sandler, J. & Sandier, A. M. (1978) On the development of object relationships and affects. IJP, 59.

753. Sarlin, C. N. (1962) Depersonalization and derealization. JAPA, 10.

754. Sarlin, C. N. (1970) The current status of the concept of genital primacy. JAPA. 18.

755. Sarnoff, C. A. (1978) Latency. New York: Aronson.

756. Saussure de, F. (1911) Course in General Linguistic. New York: McGraw Hill.

757. Schafer. R. (1968) Aspects of Internalization. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

758. Schafer. R. (1974) Problems in Freud's psychology of women. JAPA, 22.

759. Schafer. R. (1975) Psychoanalysis without psychodynamics. IJP, 56.

760. Schafer. R. (1976) A New Language for Psychoanalysis. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.

761. Schafer. R. (1983) The Analytic Attitude. New York: Basic Books.

762. Schechner, R. & Schuman, M. (1976) Ritual, Play and Performance New York: Seabury Press.

763. Schlesinger, N. & Robbins, F. P. (1983) A Developmental View of the Psychoanalytic Process. New York; Int. Univ. Press.

764. Schneirla, T. C. (1959) An evolutionary and developmental theory of biphasic processes underlying approach and withdrawal. In: Nebraska Symposium on Motivation, ed. H. R. Jones. London: Univ. Nebraska Press.

765. Schur, M. (1955) Comments on the metapsychology of somatization. PSOC, 10.

766. Schur, M. (1966) The Id and the Regulatory Principles of Mental Functioning. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

767. Schuster. D. B. (1969) Bisexuality and body as phallus. PQ, 38.

768. Schwartz, H. J., ed. (1984) Psychotherapy of the Combat Veteran. New York: SP Medical and Scientific Books.

769. Segal, H. (1957) Notes on symbol formation. IJP, 39.

770. Segal, H. (1964) Introduction to the Work of Melanie Klein. London: Hogarth Press, 1973.

771. Segal, H. (1973) Introduction to the work of Melanie Klein. London: W. Heinemann.

772. Segal, H. (1981) The Work of Hanna Segal. New York: Jason Aronson.

773. Segal, H. (1986) Illumination of the dim, shadowy era. Sunday Times, London, May 11, 1986.

774. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1982) Psychoanalytic theories of aggression. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 2.

775. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1984) The end phase of analysis. JAPA, 32.

776. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1985) Change and integration in psychoanalytic developmental theory. In: New Ideas in Psychoanalysis, ed. C. F. Settlage & R. Brockbank. Hillsdale, N. J. Analytic Press.

777. Shapiro, T. (1979) Clinical Psycholinguistics. New York: Plenum Press.

778. Shapiro, T. (1984) On neutrality. JAPA, 32.

779. Shengold, L. (1967) The effects of overstimulation. IJP, 48.

780. Shopper, M. (1979) The (re)discovery of the vagina and the importance of the menstrual tampon. In: Female Adolescent Development, ed. M. Sugar. New York: Brunner/Mazel.

781. Sifneos, P. E. (1975) Problems of psychotherapy of patients with alexithymic characteristics and physical disease Psychother & Psychosom., 26.

782. Slap, J. & Saykin, J. (1984) On the nature and organization of the repressed. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 4.

783. Slovenko, R. (1973) Psychiatry and Law. Boston: Little, Brown.

784. Smith, J. H. (1976) Language and the genealogy of the absent object. In: Psychiatry and the Humanities, vol. 1, ed. J. H. Smith. New Haven-Yale Univ. Press.

785. Smith, J. H. ed. (1978) Psychoanalysis and Language. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.

786. Smith, W. R. (1894) The Religion of the Semites. New York: Meridian Library, 1956.

787. Socarides, C. W. (1963) The historical development of theoretical and clinical aspects of female homosexuality. JAPA, 11.

788. Socarides, C. W. (1970) A psychoanalytic study of the desire for sexual transformation ("transsexualism"). IJP, 51.

789. Socarides, C. W. (1978) Homosexuality. New York: Jason Aronson.

790. Socarides, C. W. (1982) Abdication fathers, Homosexual Sons. In: Father and Child, ed. S. H. Cath, A. R. Gurwitt & J. M. Ross. Boston: Little, Brown.

791. Solnit, A. J. & Ritvo, S. Instinct theory. PMC. Forthcoming.

792. Sophocles. The Oedipus Cycle, tr. D. Fitts & R. Fitzgerald. New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, 1969.

793. Sours, J. A. (1974) The anorexia nervosa syndrome. IJP, 55.

794. Sours, J. A. (1980) Starving to Death in a Sia of Objects. New York: Aronson.

795. Spence, J. T. & Helmrich, R. L. (1978) Masculinity and Femininity. Austin and London: Univ. of Texas Press.

796. Sperber, D. (1974) Rethinking Symbolism. Cambridge: Cambridge Univ. Press.

797. Sperling, M. (1976) Anorexia nervosa. In: Psychosomatic Disorders in Childhood, ed. O. Sperling. New York: Aronson.

798. Spitz, R. A. (1945) Hospitalism. FSOC. 1.

799. Spitz, R. A. (1946) Anaclitic depression. PSOC, 2.

800. Spitz, R. A. (1946) Hospitalism: A follow-up report. PSOC, 2.

801. Spitz, R. A. (1946) The smiling response. Genet. Psychol. Monagr. 34.

802. Spitz, R. A. (1955) The primal cavity. PSOC, 10.

803. Spitz, R. A. (1957) No and Yes. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

804. Spitz, R. A. (1959) A Genetic Field Theory of Ego Formation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

805. Spitz, R. A. (1965) The First Year of Life. New York:Int. Univ. Press.

806. Spitz, R. A. & Wolf, K. M. (1946) The smiling response. Genet. Psycholol. Monogr., 34.

807. Spruiell, V. The self. PMC. Forthcoming.

808. Stamm, J. L. (1962) Altered ego states allied to the depersonalization. JAPA, 10.

809. Stein, M. (1971) The principle of multiple function. Bull. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 21.

810. Stekely, L. (1960) Success, success neurosis and the self. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 33.

811. Sterba, R. E. (1936—37) Hardwцrterbuch der Psychoanalyse. Vienna: Int. Psychoanal. Verlag.

812. Stern, D. N. (1974) The goal and structure of mother-infant play. J. Amer. Acad. Child Psychiat., 13.

813. Stern, D. N. (1984) Affect attunement. In: Frontiers of Infant Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books, vol. 2.

814. Stern, D. N. (1985) The Interpersonal World of the Infant New York: Basic Books.

815. Stevens, A. (1982) Archetype. London: Rouledge & Kegan Paul.

816. Stoller, R. J. (1971) The term "transvestism". Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 24.

817. Stoller, R. J. (1972) The "bedrock" of masculinity and femininity: bisexuality. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 26.

818. Stoller, R. J. (1974) Hostility and mystery in perversion. IJP, 55.

819. Stoller, R. J. (1975) Sex and Gender, vol. 2. New York: Jason Aronson.

820. Stoller, R. J. (1976) Primary femininity. JAPA, 24 (5).

821. Stoller, R. J. (1982) Hear miss. In: Eating, Sleeping, and Sexuality, ed. M. Zalea. New York: Brunner/ Mazel.

822. Stoller, R. J. (1985) Observing the Erotic Imagination. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.

823. Stolorow, R. (1984) Self psychology — a structural psychology. In: Reflections on Self Psychology, ed. J. Lichtenberg & S. Kaplan Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.

824. Stolorow, R. Transference. PMC. Forthcoming.

825. Stone, L. (1954) The widening scope of indications for psychoanalysis. JAPA, 2.

826. Stone, L. (1961) The Psychoanalytic Situation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

827. Stone, L. (1967) The psychoanalytic situation and transference. JAPA, 15.

828. Stone, L. (1971) Reflections on the psychoanalytic concept of aggression. FQ, 40.

829. Stone, L. (1973) On resistance to the psychoanalytic process. In: Psychoanalysis and Contemporary Science, ed. B. B. Rubinstein. New York: Macmillan, vol. 2.

830. Stone, M. H. (1980) Borderline Syndromes. New York: McGrow Hill.

831. Strachey, J. (1934) The nature of the therapeutic action of psychoanalysis. IJP, 15.

832. Strachey, J. (1962) The emergence of Freud's fundamental hypothesis. SE, 3.

833. Strachey, J. (1963) Obituary (Joan Riviere). IJP, 44.

834. Strachey, J. (1966) General preface. SE, 1.

835. Swank, R. L. (1949) Combat exhaustion. J. Nerv. Ment. Dis., 109.

836. Szekely, L. (1960) Success, success neurosis and the self. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 33.

837. Taylor, G. J. (1977) Alexithymia and countertranceference. Psychother & Psychosom., 28.

838. Ticho, E. (1972) Termination of psychoanalysis. PQ, 41.

839. Tolpin, M. (1970) The infantile neurosis. PSOC, 25.

840. Tolpin, M. (1971) On the beginnings of a cohesive self. PSOC. 26.

841. Tolpin, M. & Kohut, H. (1980) The disorders of the self. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. Greenspan & G. Pollock. Washington, B. C.: U. S. Dept. Health and Human Services.

842. Turkle, S. (1986) A review of Grosskurth, P.: Molanie Klein. New York: Times Books, Review, May 18, 1986.

843. Tyson, P. Development. PMC. Forthcoming.

844. Tyson, P. (1982) A developmental line of gender identity, gender role, and choice of love object. JAPA, 30.

845. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. Development. PMC. Forthcoming.

846. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. The psychoanalitic theory of development. PMC. Forthcoming.

847. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. (1984) Narcissism and superego development. JAPA, 34.

848. Tyson, R. & Sundler, J. (1971) Problems in the selection of patients for psychoanalysis. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 44.

849. Valenstein, A. F. (1979) The concept of "classical" psycho-analysis. JAPA. 27. (suppl.).

850. Volkan, V. D. (1981) Linking Objects and Linking Phenomena. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

851. Waelder, R. (1930) The principle of multiple function. PQ, 5.

852. Waelder, R. (1962) Book review of Psychoanalysis, Scientific Method and Philosophy, ed. S. Hook. JAPA, 10.

853. Waelder, R. (1962) Psychoanalysis scientific method, and philosophy. JAPA, 10.

854. Waelder, R. (1963) Psychic determinism and the possibility of prediction. PQ, 32.

855. Waelder, R. (1967) Trauma and the variety of extraordinary challenges. In: Fuest (1967).

856. Waelder, R. (1967) Inhibitions, symptoms and anxiety: forty years later. PQ, 36.

857. Waldhorn, H. F. (1960) Assessment of analyzability. PQ, 29.

858. Waldhorn, H. F. & Fine, B. (1971) Trauma and symbolism. Kris Study Group monogr. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

859. Wallace, E. R. (1983) Freud and Anthropology. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

860. Wallerstein, R. Reality. PMC. Forthcoming.

861. Wallerstein, R. (1965) The goals of psychoanalysis. JAPA, 13.

862. Wallerstein, R. (1975) Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

863. Wallerstein, R. (1983) Defenses, defense mechanisms and the structure of the mind. JAPA, 31 (suppl.).

864. Wallerstein, R. (1988) One psychoanalysis or many? IJP, 69.

865. Wangh, M. (1979) Some psychoanalytic observations on boredom. IJP, 60.

866. Weinshel, E. M. (1968) Some psychoanalytic considerations on moods. IJP, 51.

867. Weinshel, E. M. (1971) The ego in health and normality. JAPA, 18.

868. Weisman, A. D. (1972) On Dying and Denying. New York: Behavioral Publications.

869. Weinstock, H. J. (1962) Successful treatment of ulcerative colitis by psychoanalysis. Brit. J. Psychoanal. Res., 6.

870. Welmore, R. J. (1963) The role of grief in psychoanalysis. IJP. 44.

871. Werner, H. & Kaplan, B. (1984) Symbol Formation. Hillsdale N. J.: Lawrence Eribaum.

872. White. R. W. (1963) Ego and Reality in Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, 3.

873. Whitman, R. M. (1963) Remembering and forgetting dreams in psychoanalysis. JAPA, 11.

874. Wiedeman, G. Sexuality. PMC. Forthcoming.

875. Wiedeman, G. (1962) Survey of psychoanalytic literature on overt male homosexuality. JAPA, 10.

876. Wieder, H. (1966) Intellectuality. PSOC, 21.

877. Wieder, H. (1978) The psychoanalytic treatment of preadolescents In Child Analysis and Therapy, ed. J. Glenn. New York Aronson.

878. Willick, M. S. Defense. PMC. Forthcoming.

879. Wilson, C. P. (1967) Stone as a symbol of teeth. PQ, 36.

880. Wilson, C. P Hohan, C. & Mintz, I. (1983) Fear of Being Fat. New York: Aronson.

881. Wilson, C. P. S Mintz, I. (1982) Abstaining and bulimic anorexics. Primary Care, 9.

882. Wilson, E. O. (1978) On Human Nature. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.

883. Winnicott, C. (1978) D. W. W.: a reflection. In: Between Reality and Fantasy. New York: Jason Aronson.

884. Winnicott, D. W. (1953) Transitional object and transitional phenomena. In: Collected Papers. New York Basic Books, 1958.

885. Winnicott, D. W. (1956) Primary maternal preoccupation. In: Winnicott (1958).

886. Winnicott, D. W. (1958) Collected Papers. New York: Basic Books, Inc.

887. Winnicott, D. W. (1960) Ego distortions in terms of true and false self. In: The Maturational Processes and the Facilitating Environment. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1965.

888. Winnicott, D. W. (1960) The theory of the parent-infant relationship. In: Winnicott (1965).

889. Winnicott, D. W. (1965) The Maturational Processes and the Facilitating Environment. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

890. Winnicott, D. W. (1971) Playing and Reality. New York: Basic Books.

891. Winnicott, D. W. (1971) Therapeutic Consultations in Child Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books.

892. Winnicott, D. W. (1977) The Piggle. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

893. Winson, J. (1985) Brain and Psyche. New York: Anchor Press.

894. Wolf, E. S. (1976) Ambience and abstinence. Annu. Psycho-anal., 4.

895. Wolf, E. S. (1980) On the developmental line of self-object relations. In: Advances in Self Psychology, ed. A. Goldberg. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

896. Wolf, E. S. (1983) Empathy and countertransference. In: The Future of Psychoanalysis, ed. A. Coldberg. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

897. Wolf, E. S. (1984) Disruptions in the psychoanalytic treatment of disorders of the self. In: Kohut's Legacy, ed. P. Stepansky & A. Coldberg, Hillsdale, H. J.: Analytic Press, 1984.

898. Wolf, E. S. (1984) Selfobject relations disorders. In: Character Pathology, ed. M. Zales. New York: Bruner/Mazel.

899. Wolf, E. S. & Trosman, H. (1974) Freud and Popper-Lynkeus. JAPA, 22.

900. Wolfenstein, M. (1966) How is mourning possible? PSOC, 21.

901. Wolman, B. B. ed. (1977) The International Encyclopedia of Psychiatry, Psychology, Psychoanalysis, and Neurology. New York: Aesculapius.

902. Wolpert, E. A. (1980) Major affective disorders. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. H. I. Kaplan, A. M. Freedman & B. J. Saddock. Boston: Williams & Wilkins, vol. 2.

903. Wurmser, L. (1977) A defense of the use of metaphor in analytic theory formation. PQ, 46.

904. Wurmser, L. (1981) The Mask of Shame. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Univ. Press.

905. Zetzel, E. R. (1956) Current concepts of transference. TJP, 37.

Словарь психоаналитических терминов и понятий > БИБЛИОГРАФИЯ
9 ἄν

ἄν (A), [pron. full] [ᾰ], [dialect] Ep., Lyr., [dialect] Ion., Arc., [dialect] Att.; also κεν) [dialect] Ep., [dialect] Aeol., Thess., κᾱ [dialect] Dor., [dialect] Boeot., El.; the two combined in [dialect] Ep. (infr. D. 11.2) and Arc.,

A εἰκ ἄν IG5(2).6.2
, 15 (iv B. C.):—modal Particle used with Verbs to indicate that the action is limited by circumstances or defined by conditions. In Hom. κε is four times as common as ἄν, in Lyr. about equally common. No clear distinction can be traced, but κε as an enclitic is somewhat less emphatic; ἄν is preferred by Hom. in negative clauses, κε ([etym.] ν) with the relative.

A In Simple Sentences, and in the Apodosis of Compound Sentences; here ἄν belongs to the Verb, and denotes that the assertion made by the Verb is dependent on a condition, expressed or implied: thus ἦλθεν he came, ἦλθεν ἄν he would have come (under conditions, which may or may not be defined), and so he might have come; ἔλθοι may he come, ἔλθοι ἄν he would come (under certain conditions), and so he might come.

I WITH INDICATIVE:

1 with historical tenses, generally [tense] impf. and [tense] aor., less freq. [tense] plpf., never [tense] pf., v. infr.,

a most freq. in apodosis of conditional sentences, with protasis implying nonfulfilment of a past or present condition, and apod. expressing what would be or would have been the case if the condition were or had been fulfilled. The [tense] impf. with ἄν refers to continued action, in Hom. always in past time, exc. perh. καί κε θάμ' ἐνθάδ' ἐόντες ἐμισγόμεθ' Od.4
. 178; later also in [tense] pres. time, first in Thgn.905; πολὺ ἂν θαυμαστότερον ἦν, εἰ ἐτιμῶντο it would be far more strange if they were honoured, Pl.R. 489a; οὐκ ἂν νήσων ἐκράτει, εἰ μή τι καὶ ναυτικὸν εἶχεν he would not have been master of islands if he had not had also some naval power, Th.1.9. The [tense] aor. strictly refers only to past time, Pi.N.11.24, etc.; εἰ τότε ταύτην ἔσχε τὴν γνώμην, οὐδὲν ἂν ὧν νυνὶ πεποίηκεν ἔπραξεν if he had then come to this opinion, he would have accomplished nothing of what he has now done, D.4.5, al., but is used idiomatically with Verbs of saying, answering, etc., as we say I should have said, εἰ μὴ πατὴρ ἦσθ', εἶπον ἄν σ' οὐκ εὖ φρονεῖν S.Ant. 755
, cf. Pl.Smp. 199d, Euthphr. 12d, etc.: the [tense] plpf. refers to completed actions, as ὃ εἰ ἀπεκρίνω, ἱκανῶς ἂν ἤδη παρὰ σοῦ τὴν ὁσιότητα ἐμεμαθήκη I should have already learnt.., ib. 14c; εἰ ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀπέθανεν, δικαίως ἂν ἐτεθνήκει Antipho 4.2.3
.

b the protasis is freq. understood: ὑπό κεν ταλασίφρονά περ δέος εἷλεν fear would have seized even the stout-hearted (had he heard the sound), Il.4.421; τὸ γὰρ ἔρυμα τῷ στρατοπέδῳ οὐκ ἂν ἐτειχίσαντο they would not have built the wall (if they had not won a battle), Th.1.11; πολλοῦ γὰρ ἂν ἦν ἄξια for (if that were so) they would be worth much, Pl.R. 374d; οὐ γὰρ ἦν ὅ τι ἂν ἐποιεῖτε for there was nothing which you could have done, i. e. would have done (if you had tried), D.18.43.

c with no definite protasis understood, to express what would have been likely to happen, or might have happened in past time: ἢ γάρ μιν ζωόν γε κιχήσεαι, ἤ κεν Ὀρέστης κτεῖνεν ὑποφθάμενος for either you will find him alive, or else Orestes may already have killed him before you, Od.4.546; ὃ θεασάμενος πᾶς ἄν τις ἀνὴρ ἠράσθη δάϊος εἶναι every man who saw this (the 'Seven against Thebes') would have longed to be a warrior, Ar. Ra. 1022; esp. with τάχα, q. v., ἀλλ' ἦλθε μὲν δὴ τοῦτο τοὔνειδος τάχ' ἂν ὀργῇ βιασθὲν μᾶλλον ἢ γνώμῃ φρενῶν, i. e. it might perhaps have come, S.OT 523; τάχα ἂν δὲ καὶ ἄλλως πως ἐσπλεύσαντες (sc. διέβησαν ) and they might also perhaps have crossed by sea (to Sicily) in some other way, Th.6.2, cf. Pl.Phdr. 265b.

d ἄν is freq. omitted in apodosi with Verbs expressing obligation, propriety, or possibility, as ἔδει, ἐχρῆν, εἰκὸς ἦν, etc., and sts. for rhetorical effect, εἰ μὴ.. ᾖσμεν, φόβον παρέσχεν it had caused (for it would have caused) fear, E.Hec. 1113. This use becomes more common in later Gk.

2 with [tense] fut. ind.:

a frequently in [dialect] Ep., usu. with κεν, rarely ἄν, Il.9.167, 22.66, indicating a limitation or condition, ὁ δέ κεν κεχολώσεται ὅν κεν ἵκωμαι and he will likely be angry to whom- soever I shall come, ib.1.139; καί κέ τις ὧδ' ἐρέει and in that case men will say, 4.176; ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι καταλέξω Od.3.80
; so in Lyr., μαθὼν δέ τις ἂν ἐρεῖ Pi.N.7.68
, cf. I.6(5).59.

b rarely in codd. of [dialect] Att. Prose writers, σαφὲς ἂν καταστήσετε Th.1.140
; οὐχ ἥκει, οὐδ' ἂν ἥξει δεῦρο Pl.R. 615d
, cf. Ap. 29c, X.An.2.5.13; dub. in Hp.Mul.2.174: in later Prose, Philostr. V A2.21, S E.M.9.225: also in Poetry, E.El. 484, Ar.Av. 1313; οὐκ ἂν προδώσω Herod.6.36
(corr. - δοίην):— for ἄν with [tense] fut. inf. and part. v. infr.

II WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, only in [dialect] Ep., the meaning being the same as with the [tense] fut. ind. (1.2a), freq. with [ per.] 1st pers., as εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώῃσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι in that case I will take her myself, Il.1.324; πείθευ, ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι εἰδέω χάριν obey and if so I will be grateful, 14.235 (the subj. is always introduced by δέ in this usage); also with other persons, giving emphasis to the future, οὐκ ἄν τοι χραίσμῃ κίθαρις 3.54
, al.

III WITH OPTATIVE (never [tense] fut., rarely [tense] pf. πῶς ἂν λελήθοι [με]; X.Smp.3.6):

a in apodosis of conditional sentences, after protasis in opt. with εἰ or some other conditional or relative word, expressing a [tense] fut. condition: ἀλλ' εἴ μοί τι πίθοιο, τό κεν πολὺ κέρδιον εἴη Il.7.28
; οὐ πολλὴ ἂν ἀλογία εἴη, εἰ φοβοῖτο τὸν θάνατον; Pl.Phd. 68b
:—in Hom. [tense] pres. and [tense] aor. opt. with κε or ἄν are sts. used like [tense] impf. and [tense] aor. ind. with ἄν in Attic, with either regular ind. or another opt. in the protasis: καί νύ κεν ἔνθ' ἀπόλοιτο.. εἰ μὴ.. νόησε κτλ., i. e. he would have perished, had she not perceived, etc., Il.5.311, cf. 5.388, 17.70; εἰ νῦν ἐπὶ ἄλλῳ ἀεθλεύοιμεν, ἦ τ' ἂν ἐγὼ.. κλισίηνδε φεροίμην if we were now contending in another's honour, I should now carry.., ib.23.274: so rarely in Trag., οὐδ' ἂν σὺ φαίης, εἴ σε μὴ κνίζοι λέχος (for εἰ μὴ ἔκνιζε) E.Med. 568.

b with protasis in [tense] pres. or [tense] fut., the opt. with ἄν in apodosi takes a simply future sense: φρούριον δ' εἰ ποιήσονται, τῆς μὲν γῆς βλάπτοιεν ἄν τι μέρος they might perhaps damage, Th.1.142, cf. 2.60, Pl.Ap. 25b, R. 333e; ἢν οὖν μάθῃς.. οὐκ ἂν ἀποδοίην Ar.Nu. 116
, cf. D.1.26, al.

c with protasis understood: φεύγωμεν· ἔτι γάρ κεν ἀλύξαιμεν κακὸν ἦμαρ Od.10.269
; οὔτε ἐσθίουσι πλείω ἢ δύνανται φέρειν· διαρραγεῖεν γὰρ ἄν for (if they should do so) they would burst, X. Cyr.8.2.21; τὸν δ' οὔ κε δύ' ἀνέρε.. ἀπ' οὔδεος ὀχλίσσειαν two men could not heave the stone from the ground, i. e. would not, if they should try, Il.12.447; οὐδ' ἂν δικαίως ἐς κακὸν πέσοιμί τι S.Ant. 240
, cf. D.2.8: in Hom. sts. with ref. to past time, Τυδεΐδην οὐκ ἂν γνοίης ποτέροισι μετείη Il.5.85
.

d with no definite protasis implied, in potential sense: ἡδέως δ' ἂν ἐροίμην Λεπτίνην but I would gladly ask Leptines, D.20.129; βουλοίμην ἄν I should like , Lat. velim (but ἐβουλόμην ἄν I should wish, if it were of any avail, vellem); ποῖ οὖν τραποίμεθ' ἄν; which way then can we turn? Pl.Euthd. 290a; οὐκ ἂν μεθείμην τοῦ θρόνου I will not give up the throne, Ar.Ra. 830; idiomatically, referring to the past, αὗται δὲ οὐκ ἂν πολλαὶ εἶεν but these would not (on investigation) prove to be many, Th.1.9; εἴησαν δ' ἂν οὗτοι Κρῆτες these would be (i. e. would have been) Cretans, Hdt.1.2: used in order to soften assertions by giving them a less positive form, as οὐκ ἂν οὖν πάνυ γέ τι σπουδαῖον εἴη ἡ δικαιοσύνη, i.e. it would not prove to be, etc. (for, it is not, etc.), Pl.R. 333e.

e in questions, expressing a wish: τίς ἂν θεῶν.. δοίη; S.OC 1100
, cf.A.Ag. 1448; πῶς ἂν θάνοιμι; S.Aj. 389
: hence (with no question) as a mild command, exhortation, or entreaty, τλαίης κεν Μενελάῳ ἐπιπροέμεν ταχὺν ἰόν Il.4.94
; σὺ μὲν κομίζοις ἂν σεαυτὸν ᾗ θέλεις you may take yourself off (milder than κόμιζε σεαυτόν), S.Ant. 444; χωροῖς ἂν εἴσω you may go in, El. 1491; κλύοις ἂν ἤδη, Φοῖβε hear me now, Phoebus, ib. 637; φράζοις ἄν, λέγοις ἄν, Pl.Phlb. 23c, 48b.

f in a protasis which is also an apodosis: εἴπερ ἄλλῳ τῳ ἀνθρώπων πειθοίμην ἄν, καὶ σοὶ πείθομαι if I would trust any (other) man (if he gave me his word), I trust you, Id.Prt. 329b; εἰ μὴ ποιήσαιτ' ἂν τοῦτο if you would not do this (if you could), D.4.18, cf. X.Mem.1.5.3, Plot.6.4.16.

g rarely omitted with opt. in apodosis: ῥεῖα θεός γ' ἐθέλων καὶ τηλόθεν ἄνδρα σαώσαι Od.3.231
, cf. 14.123, Il.5.303; also in Trag., θᾶσσον ἢ λέγοι τις E.Hipp. 1186
; τεὰν δύνασιν τίς.. κατάσχοι; S.Ant. 605
.

h ἄν c. [tense] fut. opt. is prob. always corrupt (cf. 1.2b), as τὸν αὐτὸν ἂν ἐπαινέσοι ( ἐπαινέσαι Bekk.) Pl.Lg. 719e; εἰδὼς ὅτι οὐδέν' ἂν καταλήψοιτο ( οὐδένα Bekk.) Lys.1.22.

IV WITH INF. and PART. (sts. ADJ. equivalent to part., τῶν δυνατῶν ἂν κρῖναι Pl.R. 577b
) representing ind. or opt.:

1 [tense] pres. inf. or part.:

a representing [tense] impf. ind., οἴεσθε τὸν πατέρα.. οὐκ ἂν φυλάττειν; do you think he would not have kept them safe? ([etym.] οὐκ ἂν ἐφύλαττεν), D.49.35; ἀδυνάτων ἂν ὄντων [ὑμῶν] ἐπιβοηθεῖν when you would have been unable, Th.1.73, cf. 4.40.

b representing [tense] pres. opt., πόλλ' ἂν ἔχων (representing ἔχοιμ' ἄν) ἕτερ' εἰπεῖν παραλείπω D. 18.258
, cf. X.An.2.3.18: with Art., τὸ ἐθέλειν ἂν ἰέναι ἄκλητος ἐπὶ δεῖπνον Pl.Smp. 174b
.

2 [tense] aor. inf. or part.:

a representing [tense] aor. ind., οὐκ ἂν ἡγεῖσθ' αὐτὸν κἂν ἐπιδραμεῖν; do you not think he would even have run thither? ([etym.] καὶ ἐπέδραμεν ἄν), D.27.56; ἴσμεν ὑμᾶς ἀναγκασθέντας ἄν we know you would have been compelled, Th.1.76, cf. 3.89; ῥᾳδίως ἂν ἀφεθείς when he might easily have been acquitted, X.Mem.4.4.4.

b representing [tense] aor. opt., οὐδ' ἂν κρατῆσαι αὐτοὺς τῆς γῆς ἡγοῦμαι I think they would not even be masters of the land ([etym.] οὐδ' ἂν κρατήσειαν), Th.6.37, cf. 2.20; ὁρῶν ῥᾳδίως ἂν αὐτὸ ληφθέν ([etym.] ληφθείη ἄν) Id.7.42; οὔτε ὄντα οὔτε ἂν γενόμενα, i.e. things which are not and never could happen ([etym.] ἃ οὔτε ἂν γένοιτο), Id.6.38.

3 [tense] pf. inf. or part. representing:

a [tense] plpf. ind., πάντα ταῦθ' ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων ἂν ἑαλωκέναι ([etym.] φήσειεν ἄν ) he would say that all these would have been destroyed by the barbarians ([etym.] ἑαλώκη ἄν), D.19.312.

b [tense] pf. opt., οὐκ ἂν ἡγοῦμαι αὐτοὺς δίκην ἀξίαν δεδωκέναι, εἰ.. καταψηφίσαισθε I do not believe they would (then) have suffered ([etym.] δεδωκότες ἂν εἶεν) punishment enough, etc., Lys.27.9.

4 [tense] fut. inf.or part., never in [dialect] Ep., and prob. always corrupt in [dialect] Att., νομίζων μέγιστον ἂν σφᾶς ὠφελήσειν (leg. - ῆσαι) Th.5.82, cf. 6.66, 8.25,71; part. is still more exceptional, ὡς ἐμοῦ οὐκ ἂν ποιήσοντος ἄλλα Pl.Ap. 30c
(codd.), cf. D.19.342 (v. l.); both are found in later Gk., νομίσαντες ἂν οἰκήσειν οὕτως ἄριστα Plb.8.30.8
, cf. Plu.Marc.15, Arr.An.2.2.3; with part., Epicur. Nat.14.1, Luc.Asin.26, Lib.Or.62.21, dub. l. in Arr.An.6.6.5.

B IN DEPENDENT CLAUSES.

I In the protasis of conditional sentences with εἰ, regularly with the subjunctive. In Attic εἰ ἄν is contracted into ἐάν, ἤν, or ἄν ([etym.] ᾱ) (q. v.): Hom. has generally εἴ κε (or αἴ κε), sts. ἤν, once εἰ δ' ἄν Il.3.288
, twice εἴπερ ἄν 5.224
, 232. The protasis expresses either future condition (with apod. of [tense] fut. time) or general condition (with apod. of repeated action): εἰ δέ κεν ὣς ἔρξῃς καί τοι πείθωνται Ἀχαιοί, γνώσῃ ἔπειθ' ὅς .. if thus thou shalt do.., ib.2.364; ἢν ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνῄσκειν if death (ever) come near.., E.Alc. 671.

2 in relative or temporal clauses with a conditional force; here ἄν coalesces with ὅτε, ὁπότε, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, cf. ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ἐπήν or ἐπάν ([dialect] Ion. ἐπεάν) , ἐπειδάν: Hom. has ὅτε κε (sts. ὅτ' ἄν) , ὁππότε κε (sts. ὁπότ' ἄν or ὁππότ' ἄν) , ἐπεί κε ( ἐπεὶ ἄν Il.6.412
), ἐπήν, εὖτ' ἄν; v. also εἰσόκε ([etym.] εἰς ὅ κε):—τάων ἥν κ' ἐθέλωμι φίλην ποιήσομ' ἄκοιτιν whomsoever of these I may wish.., Il.9.397; ὅταν δὴ μὴ σθένω, πεπαύσομαι when I shall have no strength.., S.Ant.91; ἐχθρὸς γάρ μοι κεῖνος.. ὅς χ' ἕτερον μὲν κεύθῃ ἐνὶ φρεσίν, ἄλλο δὲ εἴπῃ who ever conceals one thing in his mind and speaks another, Il.9.312, cf. D.4.6, Th.1.21. —Hom. uses subj. in both the above constructions (1 and 2 ) without ἄν; also Trag. and Com., S.Aj. 496, Ar.Eq. 805; μέχρι and πρίν occasionally take subj. without ἄν in prose, e.g. Th.1.137,4.16 ([etym.] μέχρι οὗ), Pl.Phd. 62c, Aeschin.3.60.

3 in final clauses introduced by relative Advbs., as ὡς, ὅπως (of Manner), ἵνα (of Place), ὄφρα, ἕως, etc. (of Time), freq. in [dialect] Ep., σαώτερος ὥς κε νέηαι Il.1.32
; ὄφρα κεν εὕδῃ Od.3.359
; ὅπως ἂν εἰδῇ.. φράσω A.Pr. 824
; ὅπως ἂν φαίνηται κάλλιστος Pl.Smp. 198e
; μηχανητέον ὅπως ἂν διαφύγῃ Grg. 481a
(where ὅπως with [tense] fut. ind. is the regular constr.); also after ὡς in Hdt., Trag., X.An.2.5.16, al., once in Th.6.91 (but [tense] fut. ind. is regular in [dialect] Att.); ἵνα final does not take ἄν or κε exc. ἵνα εἰδότες ἤ κε θάνωμεν ἤ κεν.. φύγοιμεν Od.12.156
( ἵνα = where in S.OC 405). μή, = lest, takes ἄν only with opt. in apodosis, as S.Tr. 631, Th.2.93.

II in [dialect] Ep. sts. with OPTATIVE as with subj. (always κε ([etym.] ν), exc. εἴ περ ἂν αὐταὶ Μοῦσαι ἀείδοιεν Il.2.597
), εἴ κεν Ἄρης οἴχοιτο Od.8.353
; ὥς κε.. δοίη ᾧ κ' ἐθέλοι that he might give her to whomsoever he might please, ib.2.54: so in Hdt. in final clauses, 1.75,99:—in Od.23.135 ὥς κέν τις φαίη, κέν belongs to Verb in apod., as in ὡς δ' ἂν ἥδιστα ταῦτα φαίνοιτο X.Cyr.7.5.81
.

2 rarely in oratio obliqua, where a relat. or temp. word retains an ἄν which it would have with subj. in direct form, S.Tr. 687, X.Mem.1.2.6, Isoc.17.15; ἐπειδὰν δοκιμασθείην D.30.6
:—similarly after a preceding opt., οὐκ ἀποκρίναιο ἕως ἂν.. σκέψαιο Pl.Phd. 101d
.

III rarely with εἰ and INDICATIVE in protasis, only in [dialect] Ep.:

1 with [tense] fut. ind. as with subj.: αἴ κεν Ἰλίου πεφιδήσεται Il.15.213
:—so with relat., οἵ κέ με τιμήσουσι 1.175
.

2 with εἰ and a past tense of ind., once in Hom., εἰ δέ κ' ἔτι προτέρω γένετο δρόμος Il.23.526
; so Ζεὺς γάρ κ' ἔθηκε νῆσον εἴ κ' ἐβούλετο Orac. ap. Hdt.1.174, cf. Ar.Lys. 1099 (cod. R), A.R.1.197.

IV in later Greek, ἄν with relative words is used with INDICATIVE in all tenses, as ὅπου ἂν εἰσεπορεύετο Ev.Marc.6.56
; ὅσ' ἂν πάσχετε PFay. 136
(iv A. D.); ἔνθ' ἂν πέφυκεν ἡ ὁλότης εἶναι Phlp. in Ph.436.19
; cf. ἐάν, ὅταν.

C with [tense] impf. and more rarely [tense] aor. ind. in ITERATIVE construction, to express elliptically a condilion fulfilled whenever an opportumty offered; freq. in Hdt. (not in Pi. or A.), κλαίεσκε ἂν καὶ ὀδυρέσκετο she would (i. e. used to) weep and lament, 3.119; εἶτα πῦρ ἂν οὐ παρῆν S.Ph. 295
; εἴ τινες ἴδοιεν.., ἀνεθάρσησαν ἄν whenever they saw it, on each occasion, Th.7.71; διηρώτων ἂν αὐτοὺς τί λέγοιεν Pl.Ap. 22b
: inf. representing [tense] impf. of this constr., ἀκούω Λακεδαιμονίους τότε ἐμβαλόντας ἂν.. ἀναχωρεῖν, i. e. I hear they used to retire ([etym.] ἀνεχώρουν ἄν), D.9.48.

D GENERAL REMARKS:

I POSITION OF ἄν.

1 in A, when ἄν does not coalesce with the relat. word (as in ἐάν, ὅταν), it follows directly or is separated only by other particles, as μέν, δέ, τε, ga/r, kai/, νυ, περ, etc.; as εἰ μέν κεν.. εἰ δέ κε Il.3.281
-4; rarely by τις, as ὅποι τις ἄν, οἶμαι, προσθῇ D.2.14
:—in Hom. and Hes. two such Particles may precede κε, as εἴ περ γάρ κεν Od.8.355
, cf. Il.2.123; εἰ γάρ τίς κε, ὃς μὲν γάρ κε, Hes.Op. 280, 357; rarely in Prose, ὅποι μὲν γὰρ ἄν D.4.45
; ὁπότερος οὖν ἄν Ar.Ra. 1420
: also ὁπόσῳ πλέον ἄν Pl.Lg. 647e
, cf. 850a; ὅπου τὸ πάλαι λεγόμενον ἂν γίγνηται 739c
.

2 in apodosis, ἄν may stand either next to its Verb (before or after it), or after some other emphatic word, esp. an interrog., a negative (e. g. οὐδ' ἂν εἷς, οὐκ ἂν ἔτι, etc.), or an important Adjective or Adverb; also after a participle which represents the protasis, λέγοντος ἄν τινος πιστεῦσαι οἴεσθε; do you think they would have believed it if any one had told them? ([etym.] εἴ τις ἔλεγεν, ἐπίστευσαν ἄν), D.6.20.

3 ἄν is freq. separated from its inf. by such Verbs as οἴομαι, δοκέω, φημί, οἶδα, etc., οὐκ ἂν οἴει .. ; freq. in Pl., Grg. 486d, al.; καὶ νῦν ἡδέως ἄν μοι δοκῶ κοινωνῆσαι I think that I should, X.Cyr.8.7.25; οὕτω γὰρ ἄν μοι δοκεῖ ἥ τε πόλις ἄριστα διοικεῖσθαι Aeschin.3.2
; ἃ μήτε προῄδει μηδεὶς μήτ' ἂν ᾠήθη τήμερον ῥηθῆναι (where ἄν belongs to ῥηθῆναι) D. 18.225:—in the phrase οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ, or οὐκ ἂν οἶδ' εἰ, ἄν belongs not to οἶδα, but to the Verb which follows, οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ πείσαιμι, for οὐκ οἶδα εἰ πείσαιμι ἄν, E.Med. 941, cf. Alc.48; οὐκ ἂν οἶδ' εἰ δυναίμην Pl. Ti. 26b
; οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ ἐκτησάμην X.Cyr.5.4.12
.

4 ἄν never begins a sentence, or even a clause after a comma, but may stand first after a parenthetic clause, ἀλλ', ὦ μέλ', ἄν μοι σιτίων διπλῶν ἔδει Ar. Pax
<*>37.

II REPETITION OF ἄν:—in apodosis ἄν may be used twice or even three times with the same Verb, either to make the condition felt throughout a long sentence, or to emphasize certain words, ὥστ' ἄν, εἰ σθένος λάβοιμι, δηλώσαιμ' ἄν S.El. 333
, cf. Ant.69, A.Ag. 340, Th.1.76 (fin.), 2.41, Pl.Ap. 31a, Lys.20.15; ἀφανεῖς ἂν ὄντες οὐκ ἂν ὑμνήθημεν ἄν E.Tr. 1244
, cf. S.Fr. 739; attached to a parenthetical phrase, ἔδρασ' ἄν, εὖ τοῦτ' ἴσθ' ἄν, εἰ .. Id.OT 1438.

2 ἄν is coupled with κε ([etym.] ν ) a few times in Hom., as Il.11.187, 202, Od.5.361, al.; cf. ἤν περ γάρ κ' ἐθέλωσιν v.l. ib.18.318.

III ELLIPSIS OF VERB:—sts. the Verb to which ἄν belongs must be supplied, in Hom. only εἰμί, as τάτ' ἔλδεται ὅς κ' ἐπιδευής (sc. ᾖ) Il.5.481; ἀλλ' οὐκ ἂν πρὸ τοῦ (sc. ἔρρεγκον) Ar.Nu.5; τί δ' ἂν δοκεῖ σοι Πρίαμος (sc. πρᾶξαι) , εἰ τάδ' ἤνυσεν; A.Ag. 935
:—so in phrases like πῶς γὰρ ἄν; and πῶς οὐκ ἄν (sc. εἴη); also in ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ (or ὡσπερανεί), as φοβούμενος ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ παῖς (i. e. ὥσπερ ἂν ἐφοβήθη εἰ παῖς ἦν) Pl.Grg. 479a; so τοσοῦτον ἐφρόνησαν, ὅσον περ ἂν (sc. ἐφρόνησαν) εἰ.. Isoc.10.48
:—so also when κἂν εἰ ( = καὶ ἂν εἰ) has either no Verb in the apod. or one to which ἄν cannot belong, Pl.R. 477a, Men. 72c; cf. κἄν:—so the Verb of a protasis containing ἄν may be understood, ὅποι τις ἂν προσθῇ, κἂν μικρὰν δύναμιν (i. e. καὶ ἐὰν προσθῇ) D.2.14; ὡς ἐμοῦ οὖν ἰόντος ὅπῃ ἂν καὶ ὑμεῖς (sc. ἴητε) X.An.1.3.6.

IV ELLIPSIS OF ἄν:—when an apodosis consists of several co-ordinate clauses, ἄν is generally used only in the first and understood in the others: πείθοι' ἂν εἰ πείθοι'· ἀπειθοίης δ' ἴσως A.Ag. 1049
: even when the construction is continued in a new sentence, Pl.R. 352e, cf. 439b codd.: but ἄν is repeated for the sake of clearness or emphasis, ib. 398a, cf. D.19.156 (where an opt. is implied with the third ὡς): rarely expressed with the second of two co-ordinate Verbs and understood with the first, τοῦτον ἂν.. θαρσοίην ἐγὼ καλῶς μὲν ἄρχειν, εὖ δ' ἂν ἄρχεσθαι θέλειν (i. e. καλῶς μὲν ἂν ἄρχοι, εὖ δ' ἂν θέλοι ἄρχεσθαι) S.Ant. 669.

------------------------------------

ἄν (B), [pron. full] [ᾱ], [dialect] Att.,

A = ἐάν, ἤν, Th.4.46 codd., al.; freq. in Pl., ἂν σωφρονῇ Phd. 61b
; ἂν θεὸς θέλῃ ib. 80d, cf. D.4.50; ἄν τ'.. ἄν τε Arist. Ath.48.4
: not common in earlier [dialect] Att. Inscrr., IG1.2a5, 2.179b49, al.: but freq. later, SIG1044.27 (iv/iii B. C.), PPetr.2p.47 (iii B. C.), PPar.32.19 (ii B. C.), PTeb.110.8 (i B. C.), Ev.Jo.20.23, etc.

------------------------------------

ἄν (C) or [full] ἀν, Epic form of ἀνά, q. v.

------------------------------------

ἄν (D), shortened from ἄνα, v. sub ἀνά G.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἄν
10 ante

antĕ (old form anti, whence antidea, antideo, antidhac; v. antea, anteeo, and antehac) [Gr. anti, over against, facing, anta, antên; Sanscr. anti = over against; Germ. ant- in Ant-wort = Goth. anda-vaurdi, an answer, anda-nahti, the night before], prep. and adv. (acc. to Max. Victor. p. 1953, as prep. with the grave accent; as adv. with the acute on the last syl.).
I.
Prep. with acc., before (syn.: prae, pro).
A.
In space, or trop. in regard to estimation, judgment, or rank (usu. only of objects at rest. while prae is used of those in motion; cf. Herz. ad Caes. B. G. 1, 21; v. exceptions infra).
1.
In space:
quem ante aedīs video,
Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 136:
ante ostium Me audivit stare,
Ter. And. 3, 1, 16; so Vulg. Lev. 1, 5:
Ornatas paulo ante fores,
Juv. 6, 227; so Vulg. Num. 3, 26:
ante meum limen,
Juv. 11, 190:
ante suum fundum,
Cic. Mil. 10:
ut ante suos hortulos postridie piscarentur,
id. Off. 3, 14, 58:
ante sepulcrales infelix adstitit aras,
Ov. M. 8, 480; so Verg. A. 1, 344; 3, 545; Juv. 10, 268:
ante altaria,
id. 8, 155; so Vulg. Deut. 26, 4; ib. Matt. 5, 24. —Of persons:
ante hosce deos erant arulae,
Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 3:
quīs ante ora patrum contigit oppetere,
Verg. A. 1, 95; id. G. 4, 477:
ipsius unam (navem) ante oculos pontus in puppim ferit,
id. A. 1, 114; 2, 531; 2, 773:
ante se statuit funditores,
Liv. 42, 58:
Flos Asiae ante ipsum,
Juv. 5, 56; Vulg. Matt. 17, 2:
si luditur alea pernox Ante Numantinos,
Juv. 8, 11.— Trop.:
ante oculos collocata,
Cic. de Or. 1, 43, 192:
ante oculos errat domus,
Ov. Tr. 3, 4, 57: [p. 128] causam ante eum diceret, before him as judge, Cic. Verr. 1, 3, 9:
donec stet ante judicium,
Vulg. Josh. 20, 6; ib. Marc. 13, 9.—And in eccl. Lat., after the Heb. and Hel. Gr., before, in the sight of, in the judgment of:
ante Dominum vilior fiam,
Vulg. 2 Reg. 6, 21 sq.:
non te justifices ante Deum,
ib. Eccli. 7, 5:
justi ambo ante Deum,
ib. Luc. 1, 6;
and fully: fecit Asa rectum ante conspectum Domini,
ib. 3 Reg. 15, 11; ib. Apoc. 12, 10.—Hence, homines ante pedes (in later Lat.), servants; cf. the annotators upon Juv. 7, 143.—With verbs of motion:
ante me ito,
Plaut. As. 3, 3, 70:
equitatum omnem ante se mittit,
Caes. B. G. 1, 21:
ante ceteras cohortes extra aciem procurrere,
id. B. C. 1, 55:
praecurrit ante omnes,
id. ib. 2, 34; so Nep. Dat. 3, 2; Liv. 7, 41; 45, 40 al.; Vulg. Lev. 27, 11; ib. 1 Reg. 12, 2.—
2.
Trop. of preference in judgment, or regulations in respect to rank, before (this is properly the signification of prae, q. v.; hence more rare than that, and never used by Cic.): quem ante me diligo, before myself, more than myself, Balbus ap. Cic. Att. 8, 15.—So ante aliquem esse, to surpass, excel any one:
facundiā Graecos, gloriā belli Gallos ante Romanos fuisse,
Sall. C. 53, 3, ubi v. Corte and Kritz:
tum me vero et ante Alexandrum et ante Pyrrhum et ante omnes alios imperatores esse,
superior to, Liv. 35, 14:
necessitas ante rationem est,
necessity knows no law, Curt. 7, 7, 10.—Hence very freq. (but mostly poet. and post-class.),
a.
Ante alios, ante omnes, ante ceteros, etc., before others, before all, etc., to designate a comparative relation;
also sometimes, for the sake of emphasis, with comparatives and superlatives: tibi, Neptune, ante alios deos gratias ago,
Plaut. Trin. 4, 1, 5; so Ov. M. 10, 120:
scito illum ante omnīs minumi mortalem preti,
Plaut. As. 5, 2, 8:
tua ante omnes experientia,
Tac. A. 2, 76; 1, 27; Liv. 1, 9:
Junoni ante omnīs candentis vaccae media inter cornua (pateram) fundit,
Verg. A. 4, 59:
Ipse est ante omnes,
Vulg. Col. 1, 17:
O felix una ante alias Priameïa virgo,
Verg. A. 3, 321:
ante omnes furor est insignis equarum,
id. G. 3, 266:
scelere ante alios immanior omnīs,
id. A. 1, 347; Liv. 5, 42:
ante alios pulcherrimus omnīs Turnus,
Verg. A. 7, 55; so Nep. Att. 3, 3; Liv. 1, 15; cf. Rudd. II. p. 82; II. p. 101; II. p. 305.—
b.
Ante omnia.
(α).
Before all things, first of all:
alvus ante omnia ducitur,
Cels. 7, 30:
oportet autem ante omnia os nudare,
id. 8, 2:
Ante omnia instituit, ut etc.,
Suet. Ner. 32; id. Calig. 21:
Ante omnia autem, fratres, etc.,
Vulg. Jac. 5, 12; ib. 1 Petr. 4, 8.—
(β).
Comparatively, above all, especially, chiefty:
publica maestitia eo ante omnia insignis, quia matronae annum, ut parentem, eum luxerunt,
Liv. 2, 7; 7, 4:
quae natura multis et ante omnia ursis,
Plin. 8, 35, 53, § 125:
dulces ante omnia Musae,
the Muses pleasing above all things, Verg. G. 2, 475; id. E. 2, 72:
deformem et taetrum ante omnia vultum,
Juv. 10, 191.—
(γ).
In entering upon the discussion of several particulars, or in adducing arguments, first of all, in the first place (similar to ac primum quidem, kai prôton men oun; cf. Spald. ad Quint. 4, 2, 4):
ante omnia quid sit rhetorice,
Quint. 2, 15, 1:
ante omnia igitur imitatio per se ipsa non sufficit,
id. 10, 2, 4; so id. 1, 2, 9; 4, 2, 40; 4, 2, 52; 5, 13, 6; 9, 1, 23.—
B.
Of time.
1.
Before: ANTE MERIDIEM CAVSAM CONICITO, Fragm. XII. Tab. ap. Auct. ad Her. 2, 13; cf.
Dirks. Transl. 177 sq.: ante lucem a portu me praemisisti domum,
Plaut. Am. 2, 1, 55; so Cic. de Or. 2, 64, 259; id. Inv. 2, 4, 15; Suet. Galb. 22; Vulg. Luc. 24, 22:
ante diem caupo sciet,
Juv. 9, 108:
ante brumam,
Ter. Phorm. 4, 4, 28:
ante noctem,
Hor. S. 1, 4, 51:
pereundum erit ante lucernas,
Juv. 10, 339:
ante haec omnia,
Vulg. Luc. 21, 12.— The designation of time is often expressed paraphrastically.
a.
By a person who lived at the time:
jam ante Socratem,
before the time of, Cic. Ac. 1, 12, 44:
qui honos togato habitus ante me est nemini,
before me, before my time, id. Cat. 4, 3:
ante Jovem nulli subigebant arva coloni,
Verg. G. 1, 125:
vixere fortes ante Agamemnona Multi,
Hor. C. 4, 9, 25:
ante Helenam,
id. S. 1, 3, 107:
ante se,
Tac. H. 1, 50:
quod ante eum nemo,
Suet. Caes. 26 al. —
b.
By other objects pertaining to a particular time: ante hoc factum, Plaut. Mil. 4, 8, 64:
ante has meas litteras,
i. e. before the receipt of this letter, Cic. Fam. 13, 17:
per hunc castissimum ante regiam injuriam sanguinem juro,
Liv. 1, 59:
ante mare et terras, et quod tegit omnia, caelum,
Ov. M. 1, 5:
ante sidus fervidum,
Hor. Epod. 1, 27:
ante cibum,
id. S. 1, 10, 61, and Juv. 6, 428:
Hoc discunt omnes ante alpha et beta,
before their A B C, id. 14, 209:
cur ante tubam tremor occupat artus?
Verg. A. 11, 424:
Tecum prius ergo voluta Haec ante tubas,
Juv. 1, 169.—Also by the designation of the office of a person:
ante aedilitatem meam,
Cic. Att. 12, 17:
ante sceptrum Dictaei regis,
Verg. G. 2, 536:
ante imperium ducis,
Flor. 4, 2, 66:
relictis multis filiis et in regno et ante regnum susceptis,
Just. 2, 10.—And by the designation of office in app. to the person:
mortuus est ante istum praetorem,
Cic. Verr. 1, 45, 115:
docuerant fabulas ante hos consules,
id. Brut. 18, 73:
cum ante illum imperatorem clipeis uterentur,
Nep. Iphicr. 1, 3:
quos ante se imperatorem nemo ausus sit aspicere,
id. Epam. 8, 3.—A part. perf. or fut. pass. is freq. added to such substantives for the sake of explanation:
ante hanc urbem conditam,
before the founding of this city, Cic. Tusc. 5, 3, 7 (opp. post urbem conditam):
non multo ante urbem captam,
id. Div. 1, 45:
ante Epaminondam natum,
Nep. Epam. 10, 4:
ante te cognitum multis orantibus opem tuli,
Sall. J. 110, 2:
ante decemviros creatos,
Liv. 3, 53 al. —
2.
Hence particular phrases.
a.
Ante tempus,
(α).
Before the right time:
ante tempus excitatis suis,
Liv. 31, 36.—
(β).
Before the appointed, proper, or lawful time:
factus est consul bis, primum ante tempus,
Cic. Lael. 3:
honores et ante tempus et quosdam novi generis cepit,
Suet. Aug. 26:
venisti ante tempus torquere nos?
Vulg. Matt. 8, 29 (cf. annus, II. D.).—
b.
Ante diem, poet.,
(α).
Before the time:
Caesaribus virtus contigit ante diem,
Ov. A. A. 1, 184:
ante diem vultu gressuque superbo Vicerat aequales,
Stat. S. 2, 1, 108.—
(β).
Before the time destined by fate:
filius ante diem patrios inquirit in annos,
Ov. M. 1, 148:
hic dolor ante diem Pandiona misit ad umbras,
id. ib. 6, 675; id. A. A. 3, 739:
sed misera ante diem subitoque accensa furore, etc.,
Verg. A. 4, 697 (cf. Soph. Antig. 461: ei de tou chronou prosthen thanoumai). —
c.
Ante hunc diem, with a negative:
istunc hominem numquam audivi ante hunc diem,
never before this day, never until now, Plaut. Ep. 3, 4, 60; 4, 2, 7:
neque umquam ante hunc diem,
Ter. Hec. 4, 4, 19; 5, 4, 23:
Novum crimen et ante hunc diem inauditum ad te Q. Tubero detulit,
Cic. Lig. 1, 1 (cf. Plaut. Trin. 5, 2, 17: neque eum ante usquam conspexi prius). —
3.
Ante diem (abbrev. a. d.) with an ordinal number gives the date, not of the foregoing, but of the present day; e. g. ante diem quintum (a. d. V.) Kalendas Apriles, the fifth day before the calends of April. Orig. the ante belonged to Kalendas, and they said either, ante die quinto Kalendas (i. e. die quinto ante Kalendas), or ante diem quintum Kalendas; the latter phraseology became the prevailing one, and ante diem, being considered as one word, the prepp. in and ex could be prefixed; cf. Manut. ad Cic. Fam. 3, 12; Duker ad Liv. 27, 23; Rudd. II. p. 291; Madv. Gr. Suppl. I.; Drak. ad Liv. 45, 2, 12: me ante diem XIII. Kalendas Januarias principem revocandae libertatis fuisse, the thirteenth before the calends of January, i. e. the 20 th of Dec., Cic. Phil. 14, 7, 20: ante diem XII. Kalendas Novembres, the 21 st of Oct.: ante diem VI. Kalendas Novembres, the 27 th of Oct., id. Cat. 1, 3: ante diem VIII. Kalendas Decembres, the 24 th of Nov., id. Phil. 3, 8: a. d. IV. Id. Mart. (ante diem quartum Idus Martias), i. e. the 12 th of March, Liv. 40, 59: ante diem III. Non. Jan. M. Cicero natus est, i. e. on the 3 d of Jan., Gell. 15, 28 al.:
in ante diem quartum Kal. Dec. distulit,
Cic. Phil. 3, 8: caedem te optimatium contulisse in ante diem V. Kal. Nov., to the 28 th of Oct., id. Cat. 1, 3:
ex ante diem VII. Id. Febr.,
Varr. R. R. 1, 28, 1: nuntii venerant ex ante diem Non. Jun. usque ad prid. Kal. Sept., from the 3 d of June, Cic. Att. 3, 17:
supplicatio indicta est ante diem V. Id. Oct. cum eo die in quinque dies,
Liv. 45, 2, 12.—
4.
Sometimes to designate the whole time until the passing moment:
ante id tempus et mari et terrā duces erant Lace daemonii,
Nep. Arist. 2, 3:
qui honos huic uni ante id tempus contigit,
id. Timoth. 2, 3:
invictus ante eam diem fuerat,
Curt. 5, 3, 22.—
5.
Ante annos, before the destined time:
Ante suos annos occidit,
Ov. Am. 2, 2, 46:
Ante annos animumque gerens curamque virilem,
beyond his years, Verg. A. 9, 311 (cf.:
suos annos praeterire,
Sil. 4, 428; and:
annos transcendere factis,
id. 2, 348). —
6.
Ante hoc, for antea, antehac, belongs to the later Latin:
ante hoc incognita,
Luc. 6, 116:
ante hoc domūs pars videntur,
Tac. G. 13.
II.
Adv., of space and time (the latter most freq.).
A.
Of space, before, in front, forwards: post me erat Aegina, ante Megara, Sulp. ap. Cic. Fam. 4, 5, 9:
fluvius ab tergo, ante circaque velut ripa praeceps oram ejus omnem cingebat,
Liv. 27, 18; 22, 5:
coronatus stabit et ante calix,
Tib. 2, 5, 98:
plena oculis et ante et retro,
Vulg. Apoc. 4, 6.—Of motion (cf. supra, I. A. 1.):
si aut manibus ingrediatur quis aut non ante, sed retro,
Cic. Fin. 5, 12, 35:
pallida Tisiphone morbos agit ante metumque,
Verg. G. 3, 552.—
B.
1.. Of time, before, previously (always in reference to another past time, while ante as prep. is used in reference to the present).
a.
With verbs:
nonne oportuit Praescīsse me ante,
Ter. And. 1, 5, 4:
id te oro, ut ante eamus,
id. ib. 3, 3, 24;
very freq. in Cic.: quod utinam illi ante accidisset,
Cic. Phil. 11, 14:
quae ante acta sunt,
id. Verr. 1, 109:
sicut ante fecimus,
Vulg. Jos. 8, 5; ib. Jud. 16, 20:
fructus omnis ante actae vitae,
Cic. Marcell. 3; so Ov. M. 12, 115, and Tac. A. 6, 16:
apud vos ante feci mentionem,
Cic. Agr. 3, 4:
faciam hoc non novum, sed ab eis ante factum,
id. Verr. 1, 55; Verg. E. 9, 63; Juv. 3, 243; 15, 320:
illud de quo ante dixi,
Cic. Sex. Rosc. 116:
quos ante dixi,
id. Off. 2, 14, 50:
ut ante dixi,
id. Imp. Pomp. 16; id. Mil. 45:
quem ad modum ante dixi,
id. Sex. Rosc. 91:
additis, quae ante deliquerant,
Tac. A. 6, 9:
filium ante sublatum brevi amisit,
id. Agr. 6; id. G. 10; id. A. 11, 7; id. H. 2, 43.—And often accomp. by jam:
acceperam jam ante Caesaris litteras, ut etc.,
Cic. Phil. 2, 49; id. Marcell. 12; id. Verr. 2, 23.—Rarely accomp. by saepe.:
ut saepe ante fecerant,
Cic. Balb. 40; id. Rab. Post. 13.—
b.
Rarely with adjj.:
non filius ante pudicus,
Juv. 3, 111:
quos acciverat, incertum, experiens an et ante gnavos,
Tac. A. 14, 7.—
c.
Often with substt. in the abl. or acc. for a more accurate designation of time (cf. also abhinc with the abl. and acc.; in these cases ante was considered by the ancient critics as a prep., which could also govern the abl.; cf. Charis. p. 209 P.; Serv. ad Verg. E. 1, 30. The position of ante is sometimes before and sometimes after the subst., and sometimes between the numeral and the subst.):
illos septem et multis ante saeculis Lycurgum accepimus fuisse sapientes,
Cic. Tusc. 5, 3, 7:
etsi perpaucis ante diebus (i. e. before the departure of Theophilus, of whom mention is afterwards made) dederam Q. Mucio litteras ad te,
id. Fam. 4, 9:
paucis diebus ante,
id. Phil. 2, 40:
viginti annis ante,
id. Lael. 12, 42:
voverat eam annis undecim ante,
Liv. 40, 52, 4 (cf. id. 40, 51:
quae bello Ligustico ante annis octo vovisset): optimum erit ante annum scrobes facere,
a year before, Col. 4, 2; Plin. Ep. 8, 23, 7:
Tyron urbem ante annum Trojanae cladis condiderunt,
a year before the fall of Troy, Just. 18, 3, 5:
ante quadriennium amissus es,
four years previously, Tac. Agr. 45:
aliquot ante annos,
Suet. Caes. 12; v. id. ib. 81 al.—
d.
With the advv. multo, paulo, aliquanto, tanto, quanto, and rarely permultum:
multo ante prospexi tempestatem futuram,
Cic. Fam. 4, 3, 3:
haud multo ante adventum,
Tac. Agr. 18.—And in the order ante multo:
ante multo a te didicerimus,
Cic. Sen. 2, 6:
Venisti paulo ante in senatum,
id. Cat. 1, 7, 16; id. Marcell. 7; id. Mil. 7; Tac. G. 41; id. H. 3, 68; Suet. Caes. 21; Vulg. Sap. 15, 8; ib. 2 Macc. 3, 30;
6, 29 et saep.—And in the order ante paulo: quae ante paulo perbreviter attigi,
Cic. Rep. 2, 4:
profectus est aliquanto ante furorem Catilinae,
id. Sull. 20, 56 bis; id. Verr. 1, 149.—And in the order ante aliquanto: ante aliquanto quam tu natus es, Cic. Fam. [p. 129] 10, 4; id. Vatin. 25; id. Verr. 2, 46:
tanto ante praedixeras,
id. Phil. 2, 33:
quod si Cleomenes non tanto ante fugisset,
id. Verr. 2, 5, 34; 5, 78, 89; id. Cat. 3, 17; id. de Or. 1, 7, 26; so Quint. 2, 4, 28:
quanto ante providerit,
Cic. Sest. 8:
permultum ante certior factus eram litteris,
id. Fam. 3, 11; cf. Prisc. p. 1191 P.—
2.
Followed by quam (written also as one word, antequam; the form prius quam was more freq. in archaic Latin), sooner than; before.
a.
With ind. pres.:
ante quam doceo id factum non esse, libet mihi,
Cic. Quinct. 48:
ante quam ad sententiam redeo, de me pauca dicam,
id. Cat. 4, 20; id. Mil. 7; id. Deiot. 7; id. Clu. 6.—
b.
With ind. perf.:
memini Catonem anno ante quam est mortuus mecum disserere,
Cic. Lael. 3, 11:
anno ipso ante quam natus est Ennius,
id. Brut. 18, 72:
ante aliquanto quam tu natus es,
id. Fam. 10, 3:
neque ante dimisit eum quam fidem dedit,
Liv. 39, 10:
ante quam ille est factus inimicus,
Cic. Phil. 12, 9.—
c.
Rarely with fut. perf.:
ante provinciam sibi decretam audiet quam potuerit tempus ei rei datum suspicari,
Cic. Phil. 11, 24:
neque defatigabor ante quam... percepero,
id. de Or. 3, 36, 145.—
d.
With subj. pres.:
ante quam veniat in Pontum, litteras ad Cn. Pompeium mittet,
Cic. Agr. 2, 53:
hac lege ante omnia veniunt, quam gleba una ematur,
id. ib. 2, 71; id. Sest. 15; id. Phil. 1, 1; Verg. E. 1, 60 sqq.; Vulg. Gen. 11, 4; ib. 4 Reg. 2, 9; ib. Matt. 6, 8.—
e.
With subj. imperf.:
Romae et ad urbem, ante quam proficisceretur, quaerere coepit,
Cic. Verr. 2, 167:
qui (sol) ante quam se abderet, fugientem vidit Antonium,
id. Phil. 14, 27; 8, 1; id. Verr. 4, 147; Vulg. Gen. 2, 5; 13, 10; ib. Matt. 1, 18; ib. Joan. 8, 58.—
f.
With subj. perf.:
ante vero quam sit ea res adlata, laetitiā frui satis est,
Cic. Phil. 14, 1:
domesticum malum opprimit ante quam prospicere potueris,
id. Verr. 1, 39; id. Sull. 44; id. Planc. 40:
nec ante vincere desierint quam Rubro mari inclusis quod vincerent defuerit,
Liv. 42, 52:
nec ante (barbam capillumque) dempserit quam vindicāsset,
Suet. Caes. 67.—
g.
With subj. pluperf.:
se ante quam eam uxorem duxisset domum, sperāsse etc.,
Ter. Hec. 1, 2, 71:
qui ante quam de meo adventu audire potuissent, in Macedoniam perrexi,
Cic. Planc. 98:
ut consul ante fieret, quam ullum alium magistratum capere licuisset,
id. Imp. Pomp. 62; id. Quinct. 9; id. Verr. 2, 55; 2, 171.—
h.
With inf.:
dici vix potest quam multa sint quae respondeatis ante fieri oportere, quam ad hanc rationem devenire,
Cic. Quinct. 54.—
i.
With part.:
armati nullum ante finem pugnae quam morientes fecerunt,
Liv. 21, 15, 4 (on the use of these different constructions, v. Roby, §§ 1671, 1462, 1672 etc.; Draeger, Hist. Synt. II. pp. 589 sqq.;
and esp. Fischer, Gr. § 621). —In the poets sometimes with quam before ante: Respice item quam nil ad nos anteacta vetustas Temporis aeterni fuerit, quam nascimur ante,
Lucr. 3, 972:
Non ego signatis quicquam mandare tabellis, Ne legat id nemo quam meus ante, velim,
Tib. 4, 7, 8; Mart. 9, 36, 6.—Also in the poets sometimes pleon. ante—prius—quam:
sed mihi vel tellus optem prius ima dehiscat Ante, pudor, quam te violo aut tua jura resolvo,
Verg. A. 4, 24; so,
prius—quam— ante: Aut prius infecto deposcit praemia cursu, Septima quam metam triverit ante rota?
Prop. 3, 20, 25.—
3.
For the designation of order, foll. by tum, deinde, etc., first, in the first place (only in later Lat. for the class. primum):
ut ante caput, deinde reliqua pars auferatur,
Cels. 7, 29:
et ante dicam de his, quae, etc.: tum, etc.,
id. 5, 26:
ante tonderi... deinde... tum, etc.,
id. 6, 6, 8; so Plin. 34, 13, 34, § 131 dub.—
4.
Very rarely used as adj. (in imitation of the Greek):
neque enim ignari sumus ante malorum,
earlier, previous ills, Verg. A. 1, 198 (cf. tôn paros kakôn, Soph. O. T. 1423):
ille elegit, qui recipit ante meliorem,
Quint. Decl. 1, 14; cf. Liv. 24, 82, 5 (on this use of the adv., v. Kritz ad Sall. J. 76, 5).
III.
In composition.
A.
Of space, before, in front of, forwards: antepono, antefigo, antefero, antemitto.—
B.
Fig. of preference, before, above: antepono.—
C.
Of degree, before, above, more: antepotens, antepollens—
D.
In designations of time only with adjj. and advv.: antelucanus, antemeridianus, antehac, antelucio.With verbs, ante is more correctly written separately: ante actus, ante factus, ante gestus, ante paro, etc., although editions differ in this respect. V. more upon this word in Hand, Turs. I. pp. 361-390, and pp. 394-402.

Lewis & Short latin dictionary > ante
11 anti

antĕ (old form anti, whence antidea, antideo, antidhac; v. antea, anteeo, and antehac) [Gr. anti, over against, facing, anta, antên; Sanscr. anti = over against; Germ. ant- in Ant-wort = Goth. anda-vaurdi, an answer, anda-nahti, the night before], prep. and adv. (acc. to Max. Victor. p. 1953, as prep. with the grave accent; as adv. with the acute on the last syl.).
I.
Prep. with acc., before (syn.: prae, pro).
A.
In space, or trop. in regard to estimation, judgment, or rank (usu. only of objects at rest. while prae is used of those in motion; cf. Herz. ad Caes. B. G. 1, 21; v. exceptions infra).
1.
In space:
quem ante aedīs video,
Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 136:
ante ostium Me audivit stare,
Ter. And. 3, 1, 16; so Vulg. Lev. 1, 5:
Ornatas paulo ante fores,
Juv. 6, 227; so Vulg. Num. 3, 26:
ante meum limen,
Juv. 11, 190:
ante suum fundum,
Cic. Mil. 10:
ut ante suos hortulos postridie piscarentur,
id. Off. 3, 14, 58:
ante sepulcrales infelix adstitit aras,
Ov. M. 8, 480; so Verg. A. 1, 344; 3, 545; Juv. 10, 268:
ante altaria,
id. 8, 155; so Vulg. Deut. 26, 4; ib. Matt. 5, 24. —Of persons:
ante hosce deos erant arulae,
Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 3:
quīs ante ora patrum contigit oppetere,
Verg. A. 1, 95; id. G. 4, 477:
ipsius unam (navem) ante oculos pontus in puppim ferit,
id. A. 1, 114; 2, 531; 2, 773:
ante se statuit funditores,
Liv. 42, 58:
Flos Asiae ante ipsum,
Juv. 5, 56; Vulg. Matt. 17, 2:
si luditur alea pernox Ante Numantinos,
Juv. 8, 11.— Trop.:
ante oculos collocata,
Cic. de Or. 1, 43, 192:
ante oculos errat domus,
Ov. Tr. 3, 4, 57: [p. 128] causam ante eum diceret, before him as judge, Cic. Verr. 1, 3, 9:
donec stet ante judicium,
Vulg. Josh. 20, 6; ib. Marc. 13, 9.—And in eccl. Lat., after the Heb. and Hel. Gr., before, in the sight of, in the judgment of:
ante Dominum vilior fiam,
Vulg. 2 Reg. 6, 21 sq.:
non te justifices ante Deum,
ib. Eccli. 7, 5:
justi ambo ante Deum,
ib. Luc. 1, 6;
and fully: fecit Asa rectum ante conspectum Domini,
ib. 3 Reg. 15, 11; ib. Apoc. 12, 10.—Hence, homines ante pedes (in later Lat.), servants; cf. the annotators upon Juv. 7, 143.—With verbs of motion:
ante me ito,
Plaut. As. 3, 3, 70:
equitatum omnem ante se mittit,
Caes. B. G. 1, 21:
ante ceteras cohortes extra aciem procurrere,
id. B. C. 1, 55:
praecurrit ante omnes,
id. ib. 2, 34; so Nep. Dat. 3, 2; Liv. 7, 41; 45, 40 al.; Vulg. Lev. 27, 11; ib. 1 Reg. 12, 2.—
2.
Trop. of preference in judgment, or regulations in respect to rank, before (this is properly the signification of prae, q. v.; hence more rare than that, and never used by Cic.): quem ante me diligo, before myself, more than myself, Balbus ap. Cic. Att. 8, 15.—So ante aliquem esse, to surpass, excel any one:
facundiā Graecos, gloriā belli Gallos ante Romanos fuisse,
Sall. C. 53, 3, ubi v. Corte and Kritz:
tum me vero et ante Alexandrum et ante Pyrrhum et ante omnes alios imperatores esse,
superior to, Liv. 35, 14:
necessitas ante rationem est,
necessity knows no law, Curt. 7, 7, 10.—Hence very freq. (but mostly poet. and post-class.),
a.
Ante alios, ante omnes, ante ceteros, etc., before others, before all, etc., to designate a comparative relation;
also sometimes, for the sake of emphasis, with comparatives and superlatives: tibi, Neptune, ante alios deos gratias ago,
Plaut. Trin. 4, 1, 5; so Ov. M. 10, 120:
scito illum ante omnīs minumi mortalem preti,
Plaut. As. 5, 2, 8:
tua ante omnes experientia,
Tac. A. 2, 76; 1, 27; Liv. 1, 9:
Junoni ante omnīs candentis vaccae media inter cornua (pateram) fundit,
Verg. A. 4, 59:
Ipse est ante omnes,
Vulg. Col. 1, 17:
O felix una ante alias Priameïa virgo,
Verg. A. 3, 321:
ante omnes furor est insignis equarum,
id. G. 3, 266:
scelere ante alios immanior omnīs,
id. A. 1, 347; Liv. 5, 42:
ante alios pulcherrimus omnīs Turnus,
Verg. A. 7, 55; so Nep. Att. 3, 3; Liv. 1, 15; cf. Rudd. II. p. 82; II. p. 101; II. p. 305.—
b.
Ante omnia.
(α).
Before all things, first of all:
alvus ante omnia ducitur,
Cels. 7, 30:
oportet autem ante omnia os nudare,
id. 8, 2:
Ante omnia instituit, ut etc.,
Suet. Ner. 32; id. Calig. 21:
Ante omnia autem, fratres, etc.,
Vulg. Jac. 5, 12; ib. 1 Petr. 4, 8.—
(β).
Comparatively, above all, especially, chiefty:
publica maestitia eo ante omnia insignis, quia matronae annum, ut parentem, eum luxerunt,
Liv. 2, 7; 7, 4:
quae natura multis et ante omnia ursis,
Plin. 8, 35, 53, § 125:
dulces ante omnia Musae,
the Muses pleasing above all things, Verg. G. 2, 475; id. E. 2, 72:
deformem et taetrum ante omnia vultum,
Juv. 10, 191.—
(γ).
In entering upon the discussion of several particulars, or in adducing arguments, first of all, in the first place (similar to ac primum quidem, kai prôton men oun; cf. Spald. ad Quint. 4, 2, 4):
ante omnia quid sit rhetorice,
Quint. 2, 15, 1:
ante omnia igitur imitatio per se ipsa non sufficit,
id. 10, 2, 4; so id. 1, 2, 9; 4, 2, 40; 4, 2, 52; 5, 13, 6; 9, 1, 23.—
B.
Of time.
1.
Before: ANTE MERIDIEM CAVSAM CONICITO, Fragm. XII. Tab. ap. Auct. ad Her. 2, 13; cf.
Dirks. Transl. 177 sq.: ante lucem a portu me praemisisti domum,
Plaut. Am. 2, 1, 55; so Cic. de Or. 2, 64, 259; id. Inv. 2, 4, 15; Suet. Galb. 22; Vulg. Luc. 24, 22:
ante diem caupo sciet,
Juv. 9, 108:
ante brumam,
Ter. Phorm. 4, 4, 28:
ante noctem,
Hor. S. 1, 4, 51:
pereundum erit ante lucernas,
Juv. 10, 339:
ante haec omnia,
Vulg. Luc. 21, 12.— The designation of time is often expressed paraphrastically.
a.
By a person who lived at the time:
jam ante Socratem,
before the time of, Cic. Ac. 1, 12, 44:
qui honos togato habitus ante me est nemini,
before me, before my time, id. Cat. 4, 3:
ante Jovem nulli subigebant arva coloni,
Verg. G. 1, 125:
vixere fortes ante Agamemnona Multi,
Hor. C. 4, 9, 25:
ante Helenam,
id. S. 1, 3, 107:
ante se,
Tac. H. 1, 50:
quod ante eum nemo,
Suet. Caes. 26 al. —
b.
By other objects pertaining to a particular time: ante hoc factum, Plaut. Mil. 4, 8, 64:
ante has meas litteras,
i. e. before the receipt of this letter, Cic. Fam. 13, 17:
per hunc castissimum ante regiam injuriam sanguinem juro,
Liv. 1, 59:
ante mare et terras, et quod tegit omnia, caelum,
Ov. M. 1, 5:
ante sidus fervidum,
Hor. Epod. 1, 27:
ante cibum,
id. S. 1, 10, 61, and Juv. 6, 428:
Hoc discunt omnes ante alpha et beta,
before their A B C, id. 14, 209:
cur ante tubam tremor occupat artus?
Verg. A. 11, 424:
Tecum prius ergo voluta Haec ante tubas,
Juv. 1, 169.—Also by the designation of the office of a person:
ante aedilitatem meam,
Cic. Att. 12, 17:
ante sceptrum Dictaei regis,
Verg. G. 2, 536:
ante imperium ducis,
Flor. 4, 2, 66:
relictis multis filiis et in regno et ante regnum susceptis,
Just. 2, 10.—And by the designation of office in app. to the person:
mortuus est ante istum praetorem,
Cic. Verr. 1, 45, 115:
docuerant fabulas ante hos consules,
id. Brut. 18, 73:
cum ante illum imperatorem clipeis uterentur,
Nep. Iphicr. 1, 3:
quos ante se imperatorem nemo ausus sit aspicere,
id. Epam. 8, 3.—A part. perf. or fut. pass. is freq. added to such substantives for the sake of explanation:
ante hanc urbem conditam,
before the founding of this city, Cic. Tusc. 5, 3, 7 (opp. post urbem conditam):
non multo ante urbem captam,
id. Div. 1, 45:
ante Epaminondam natum,
Nep. Epam. 10, 4:
ante te cognitum multis orantibus opem tuli,
Sall. J. 110, 2:
ante decemviros creatos,
Liv. 3, 53 al. —
2.
Hence particular phrases.
a.
Ante tempus,
(α).
Before the right time:
ante tempus excitatis suis,
Liv. 31, 36.—
(β).
Before the appointed, proper, or lawful time:
factus est consul bis, primum ante tempus,
Cic. Lael. 3:
honores et ante tempus et quosdam novi generis cepit,
Suet. Aug. 26:
venisti ante tempus torquere nos?
Vulg. Matt. 8, 29 (cf. annus, II. D.).—
b.
Ante diem, poet.,
(α).
Before the time:
Caesaribus virtus contigit ante diem,
Ov. A. A. 1, 184:
ante diem vultu gressuque superbo Vicerat aequales,
Stat. S. 2, 1, 108.—
(β).
Before the time destined by fate:
filius ante diem patrios inquirit in annos,
Ov. M. 1, 148:
hic dolor ante diem Pandiona misit ad umbras,
id. ib. 6, 675; id. A. A. 3, 739:
sed misera ante diem subitoque accensa furore, etc.,
Verg. A. 4, 697 (cf. Soph. Antig. 461: ei de tou chronou prosthen thanoumai). —
c.
Ante hunc diem, with a negative:
istunc hominem numquam audivi ante hunc diem,
never before this day, never until now, Plaut. Ep. 3, 4, 60; 4, 2, 7:
neque umquam ante hunc diem,
Ter. Hec. 4, 4, 19; 5, 4, 23:
Novum crimen et ante hunc diem inauditum ad te Q. Tubero detulit,
Cic. Lig. 1, 1 (cf. Plaut. Trin. 5, 2, 17: neque eum ante usquam conspexi prius). —
3.
Ante diem (abbrev. a. d.) with an ordinal number gives the date, not of the foregoing, but of the present day; e. g. ante diem quintum (a. d. V.) Kalendas Apriles, the fifth day before the calends of April. Orig. the ante belonged to Kalendas, and they said either, ante die quinto Kalendas (i. e. die quinto ante Kalendas), or ante diem quintum Kalendas; the latter phraseology became the prevailing one, and ante diem, being considered as one word, the prepp. in and ex could be prefixed; cf. Manut. ad Cic. Fam. 3, 12; Duker ad Liv. 27, 23; Rudd. II. p. 291; Madv. Gr. Suppl. I.; Drak. ad Liv. 45, 2, 12: me ante diem XIII. Kalendas Januarias principem revocandae libertatis fuisse, the thirteenth before the calends of January, i. e. the 20 th of Dec., Cic. Phil. 14, 7, 20: ante diem XII. Kalendas Novembres, the 21 st of Oct.: ante diem VI. Kalendas Novembres, the 27 th of Oct., id. Cat. 1, 3: ante diem VIII. Kalendas Decembres, the 24 th of Nov., id. Phil. 3, 8: a. d. IV. Id. Mart. (ante diem quartum Idus Martias), i. e. the 12 th of March, Liv. 40, 59: ante diem III. Non. Jan. M. Cicero natus est, i. e. on the 3 d of Jan., Gell. 15, 28 al.:
in ante diem quartum Kal. Dec. distulit,
Cic. Phil. 3, 8: caedem te optimatium contulisse in ante diem V. Kal. Nov., to the 28 th of Oct., id. Cat. 1, 3:
ex ante diem VII. Id. Febr.,
Varr. R. R. 1, 28, 1: nuntii venerant ex ante diem Non. Jun. usque ad prid. Kal. Sept., from the 3 d of June, Cic. Att. 3, 17:
supplicatio indicta est ante diem V. Id. Oct. cum eo die in quinque dies,
Liv. 45, 2, 12.—
4.
Sometimes to designate the whole time until the passing moment:
ante id tempus et mari et terrā duces erant Lace daemonii,
Nep. Arist. 2, 3:
qui honos huic uni ante id tempus contigit,
id. Timoth. 2, 3:
invictus ante eam diem fuerat,
Curt. 5, 3, 22.—
5.
Ante annos, before the destined time:
Ante suos annos occidit,
Ov. Am. 2, 2, 46:
Ante annos animumque gerens curamque virilem,
beyond his years, Verg. A. 9, 311 (cf.:
suos annos praeterire,
Sil. 4, 428; and:
annos transcendere factis,
id. 2, 348). —
6.
Ante hoc, for antea, antehac, belongs to the later Latin:
ante hoc incognita,
Luc. 6, 116:
ante hoc domūs pars videntur,
Tac. G. 13.
II.
Adv., of space and time (the latter most freq.).
A.
Of space, before, in front, forwards: post me erat Aegina, ante Megara, Sulp. ap. Cic. Fam. 4, 5, 9:
fluvius ab tergo, ante circaque velut ripa praeceps oram ejus omnem cingebat,
Liv. 27, 18; 22, 5:
coronatus stabit et ante calix,
Tib. 2, 5, 98:
plena oculis et ante et retro,
Vulg. Apoc. 4, 6.—Of motion (cf. supra, I. A. 1.):
si aut manibus ingrediatur quis aut non ante, sed retro,
Cic. Fin. 5, 12, 35:
pallida Tisiphone morbos agit ante metumque,
Verg. G. 3, 552.—
B.
1.. Of time, before, previously (always in reference to another past time, while ante as prep. is used in reference to the present).
a.
With verbs:
nonne oportuit Praescīsse me ante,
Ter. And. 1, 5, 4:
id te oro, ut ante eamus,
id. ib. 3, 3, 24;
very freq. in Cic.: quod utinam illi ante accidisset,
Cic. Phil. 11, 14:
quae ante acta sunt,
id. Verr. 1, 109:
sicut ante fecimus,
Vulg. Jos. 8, 5; ib. Jud. 16, 20:
fructus omnis ante actae vitae,
Cic. Marcell. 3; so Ov. M. 12, 115, and Tac. A. 6, 16:
apud vos ante feci mentionem,
Cic. Agr. 3, 4:
faciam hoc non novum, sed ab eis ante factum,
id. Verr. 1, 55; Verg. E. 9, 63; Juv. 3, 243; 15, 320:
illud de quo ante dixi,
Cic. Sex. Rosc. 116:
quos ante dixi,
id. Off. 2, 14, 50:
ut ante dixi,
id. Imp. Pomp. 16; id. Mil. 45:
quem ad modum ante dixi,
id. Sex. Rosc. 91:
additis, quae ante deliquerant,
Tac. A. 6, 9:
filium ante sublatum brevi amisit,
id. Agr. 6; id. G. 10; id. A. 11, 7; id. H. 2, 43.—And often accomp. by jam:
acceperam jam ante Caesaris litteras, ut etc.,
Cic. Phil. 2, 49; id. Marcell. 12; id. Verr. 2, 23.—Rarely accomp. by saepe.:
ut saepe ante fecerant,
Cic. Balb. 40; id. Rab. Post. 13.—
b.
Rarely with adjj.:
non filius ante pudicus,
Juv. 3, 111:
quos acciverat, incertum, experiens an et ante gnavos,
Tac. A. 14, 7.—
c.
Often with substt. in the abl. or acc. for a more accurate designation of time (cf. also abhinc with the abl. and acc.; in these cases ante was considered by the ancient critics as a prep., which could also govern the abl.; cf. Charis. p. 209 P.; Serv. ad Verg. E. 1, 30. The position of ante is sometimes before and sometimes after the subst., and sometimes between the numeral and the subst.):
illos septem et multis ante saeculis Lycurgum accepimus fuisse sapientes,
Cic. Tusc. 5, 3, 7:
etsi perpaucis ante diebus (i. e. before the departure of Theophilus, of whom mention is afterwards made) dederam Q. Mucio litteras ad te,
id. Fam. 4, 9:
paucis diebus ante,
id. Phil. 2, 40:
viginti annis ante,
id. Lael. 12, 42:
voverat eam annis undecim ante,
Liv. 40, 52, 4 (cf. id. 40, 51:
quae bello Ligustico ante annis octo vovisset): optimum erit ante annum scrobes facere,
a year before, Col. 4, 2; Plin. Ep. 8, 23, 7:
Tyron urbem ante annum Trojanae cladis condiderunt,
a year before the fall of Troy, Just. 18, 3, 5:
ante quadriennium amissus es,
four years previously, Tac. Agr. 45:
aliquot ante annos,
Suet. Caes. 12; v. id. ib. 81 al.—
d.
With the advv. multo, paulo, aliquanto, tanto, quanto, and rarely permultum:
multo ante prospexi tempestatem futuram,
Cic. Fam. 4, 3, 3:
haud multo ante adventum,
Tac. Agr. 18.—And in the order ante multo:
ante multo a te didicerimus,
Cic. Sen. 2, 6:
Venisti paulo ante in senatum,
id. Cat. 1, 7, 16; id. Marcell. 7; id. Mil. 7; Tac. G. 41; id. H. 3, 68; Suet. Caes. 21; Vulg. Sap. 15, 8; ib. 2 Macc. 3, 30;
6, 29 et saep.—And in the order ante paulo: quae ante paulo perbreviter attigi,
Cic. Rep. 2, 4:
profectus est aliquanto ante furorem Catilinae,
id. Sull. 20, 56 bis; id. Verr. 1, 149.—And in the order ante aliquanto: ante aliquanto quam tu natus es, Cic. Fam. [p. 129] 10, 4; id. Vatin. 25; id. Verr. 2, 46:
tanto ante praedixeras,
id. Phil. 2, 33:
quod si Cleomenes non tanto ante fugisset,
id. Verr. 2, 5, 34; 5, 78, 89; id. Cat. 3, 17; id. de Or. 1, 7, 26; so Quint. 2, 4, 28:
quanto ante providerit,
Cic. Sest. 8:
permultum ante certior factus eram litteris,
id. Fam. 3, 11; cf. Prisc. p. 1191 P.—
2.
Followed by quam (written also as one word, antequam; the form prius quam was more freq. in archaic Latin), sooner than; before.
a.
With ind. pres.:
ante quam doceo id factum non esse, libet mihi,
Cic. Quinct. 48:
ante quam ad sententiam redeo, de me pauca dicam,
id. Cat. 4, 20; id. Mil. 7; id. Deiot. 7; id. Clu. 6.—
b.
With ind. perf.:
memini Catonem anno ante quam est mortuus mecum disserere,
Cic. Lael. 3, 11:
anno ipso ante quam natus est Ennius,
id. Brut. 18, 72:
ante aliquanto quam tu natus es,
id. Fam. 10, 3:
neque ante dimisit eum quam fidem dedit,
Liv. 39, 10:
ante quam ille est factus inimicus,
Cic. Phil. 12, 9.—
c.
Rarely with fut. perf.:
ante provinciam sibi decretam audiet quam potuerit tempus ei rei datum suspicari,
Cic. Phil. 11, 24:
neque defatigabor ante quam... percepero,
id. de Or. 3, 36, 145.—
d.
With subj. pres.:
ante quam veniat in Pontum, litteras ad Cn. Pompeium mittet,
Cic. Agr. 2, 53:
hac lege ante omnia veniunt, quam gleba una ematur,
id. ib. 2, 71; id. Sest. 15; id. Phil. 1, 1; Verg. E. 1, 60 sqq.; Vulg. Gen. 11, 4; ib. 4 Reg. 2, 9; ib. Matt. 6, 8.—
e.
With subj. imperf.:
Romae et ad urbem, ante quam proficisceretur, quaerere coepit,
Cic. Verr. 2, 167:
qui (sol) ante quam se abderet, fugientem vidit Antonium,
id. Phil. 14, 27; 8, 1; id. Verr. 4, 147; Vulg. Gen. 2, 5; 13, 10; ib. Matt. 1, 18; ib. Joan. 8, 58.—
f.
With subj. perf.:
ante vero quam sit ea res adlata, laetitiā frui satis est,
Cic. Phil. 14, 1:
domesticum malum opprimit ante quam prospicere potueris,
id. Verr. 1, 39; id. Sull. 44; id. Planc. 40:
nec ante vincere desierint quam Rubro mari inclusis quod vincerent defuerit,
Liv. 42, 52:
nec ante (barbam capillumque) dempserit quam vindicāsset,
Suet. Caes. 67.—
g.
With subj. pluperf.:
se ante quam eam uxorem duxisset domum, sperāsse etc.,
Ter. Hec. 1, 2, 71:
qui ante quam de meo adventu audire potuissent, in Macedoniam perrexi,
Cic. Planc. 98:
ut consul ante fieret, quam ullum alium magistratum capere licuisset,
id. Imp. Pomp. 62; id. Quinct. 9; id. Verr. 2, 55; 2, 171.—
h.
With inf.:
dici vix potest quam multa sint quae respondeatis ante fieri oportere, quam ad hanc rationem devenire,
Cic. Quinct. 54.—
i.
With part.:
armati nullum ante finem pugnae quam morientes fecerunt,
Liv. 21, 15, 4 (on the use of these different constructions, v. Roby, §§ 1671, 1462, 1672 etc.; Draeger, Hist. Synt. II. pp. 589 sqq.;
and esp. Fischer, Gr. § 621). —In the poets sometimes with quam before ante: Respice item quam nil ad nos anteacta vetustas Temporis aeterni fuerit, quam nascimur ante,
Lucr. 3, 972:
Non ego signatis quicquam mandare tabellis, Ne legat id nemo quam meus ante, velim,
Tib. 4, 7, 8; Mart. 9, 36, 6.—Also in the poets sometimes pleon. ante—prius—quam:
sed mihi vel tellus optem prius ima dehiscat Ante, pudor, quam te violo aut tua jura resolvo,
Verg. A. 4, 24; so,
prius—quam— ante: Aut prius infecto deposcit praemia cursu, Septima quam metam triverit ante rota?
Prop. 3, 20, 25.—
3.
For the designation of order, foll. by tum, deinde, etc., first, in the first place (only in later Lat. for the class. primum):
ut ante caput, deinde reliqua pars auferatur,
Cels. 7, 29:
et ante dicam de his, quae, etc.: tum, etc.,
id. 5, 26:
ante tonderi... deinde... tum, etc.,
id. 6, 6, 8; so Plin. 34, 13, 34, § 131 dub.—
4.
Very rarely used as adj. (in imitation of the Greek):
neque enim ignari sumus ante malorum,
earlier, previous ills, Verg. A. 1, 198 (cf. tôn paros kakôn, Soph. O. T. 1423):
ille elegit, qui recipit ante meliorem,
Quint. Decl. 1, 14; cf. Liv. 24, 82, 5 (on this use of the adv., v. Kritz ad Sall. J. 76, 5).
III.
In composition.
A.
Of space, before, in front of, forwards: antepono, antefigo, antefero, antemitto.—
B.
Fig. of preference, before, above: antepono.—
C.
Of degree, before, above, more: antepotens, antepollens—
D.
In designations of time only with adjj. and advv.: antelucanus, antemeridianus, antehac, antelucio.With verbs, ante is more correctly written separately: ante actus, ante factus, ante gestus, ante paro, etc., although editions differ in this respect. V. more upon this word in Hand, Turs. I. pp. 361-390, and pp. 394-402.

Lewis & Short latin dictionary > anti
12 volo

1.
vŏlo (2 d pers. sing. vis, orig. veis, Prisc. 9, 1, 6, p. 847 P.; 1 st pers. plur. volumus, but volimus, Plaut. Truc. 1, 2, 89 Speng.; 3 d pers. sing. volt, and 2 d pers. plur. voltis always in ante-class. writers;
also volt,
Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 17, § 42; 2, 5, 49, § 128; id. Sest. 42, 90; id. Phil. 8, 9, 26; id. Par. 5, 1, 34; id. Rep. 3, 33, 45:
voltis,
id. Verr. 2, 3, 53, § 122; 2, 3, 94, § 219; 2, 5, 5, § 11; 2, 3, 89, § 208; id. Clu. 30, 83; id. Rab. Perd. 12, 33; id. Sest. 30, 64; id. Par. 1, 2, 11 et saep. — Pres. subj. velim, but sometimes volim, Plaut. Merc. 1, 2, 44 Ritschl; cf. Prisc. 9, 1, 8, p. 848 P.;
so volint,
Plaut. Most. 1, 3, 65 Ritschl), velle, volui ( part. fut. voliturus, Serv. ad Verg. A. 5, 712; contr. forms, vin for visne, freq. in Plaut. and Ter., also Hor. S. 1, 9, 69; Pers. 6, 63:
sis for si vis,
Plaut. Capt. 1, 2, 70; id. Merc. 4, 4, 37; id. Pers. 3, 3, 8; Ter. Eun. 2, 3, 20; id. Heaut. 1, 2, 38; Cic. Tusc. 2, 18, 42; id. Rosc. Am. 16, 48; id. Mil. 22, 60; Liv. 34, 32, 20:
sultis for si voltis, only ante-class.,
Plaut. Stich. 1, 2, 8; id. As. prol. 1; id. Capt. 2, 3, 96; 3, 5, 9; 4, 4, 11), v. irreg. a. [Sanscr. var-; Gr. bol-, boulomai; cf. the strengthened root Wel- in eeldomai, elpomai; Germ. wollen; Engl. will], expressing any exercise of volition, and corresponding, in most cases, to the Germ. wollen; in Engl. mostly rendered, to wish, want, intend, purpose, propose, be willing, consent, mean, will, and, impersonally, it is my will, purpose, intention, plan, policy (syn.: cupio, opto; but volo properly implies a purpose).
I.
In gen.
A.
With object-infinitive.
1.
With pres. inf.
a.
To wish.
(α).
Exire ex urbe priusquam luciscat volo, Plaut. Am. 1, 3, 35:
potare ego hodie tecum volo,
id. Aul. 3, 6, 33:
ego quoque volo esse liber: nequiquam volo,
id. Trin. 2, 4, 39; so id. ib. 2, 4, 164:
ait rem seriam agere velle mecum,
Ter. Eun. 3, 3, 8:
natus enim debet quicunque est velle manere In vita,
Lucr. 5, 177:
video te alte spectare et velle in caelum migrare,
Cic. Tusc. 1, 34, 82:
quid poetae? Nonne post mortem nobilitari volunt?
id. ib. 1, 15, 34:
si innocentes existimari volumus,
id. Verr. 2, 2, 10, § 28:
quoniam opinionis meae voluistis esse participes,
id. de Or. 1, 37, 172:
quod eas quoque nationes adire et regiones cognoscere volebat,
Caes. B. G. 3, 7:
si velit suos recipere, obsides sibi remittat,
id. ib. 3, 8 fin.:
dominari illi volunt, vos liberi esse,
Sall. J. 31, 23:
si haec relinquere voltis,
id. C. 58, 15:
priusquam liberi estis, dominari jam in adversarios vultis,
Liv. 3, 53, 7:
si quis vestrum suos invisere volt, commeatum do,
id. 21, 21, 5:
non enim vincere tantum noluit, sed vinci voluit,
id. 2, 59, 2:
suspitionem Caesar quibusdam reliquit, neque voluisse se diutius vivere, neque curasse,
Suet. Caes. 85:
Eutrapelus cuicunque nocere volebat, Vestimenta dabat pretiosa,
Hor. Ep. 1, 18, 31.—
(β).
Idiomatically: quid arbitramini Rheginos merere velle ut ab iis marmorea illa Venus auferatur? what do you think the Rhegini would take for, etc., Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 60, § 135.—
(γ).
Transf., of things: fabula quae posci vult et spectata reponi, a comedy which wishes (i. e. is meant) to be in demand, etc., Hor. A. P. 190:
neque enim aut hiare semper vocalibus aut destitui temporibus volunt sermo atque epistula,
Quint. 9, 4, 20; cf. id. 8, prooem. 23.—
b.
Of the wishes of those that have a right to command, the gods, masters, parents, commanders, etc., I want, wish, will, am resolved, it is my will:
in acdibus quid tibi meis erat negoti...? Volo scire,
Plaut. Aul. 3, 2, 14; 3, 2, 17; 3, 2, 18; 3, 6, 27; id. Curc. 4, 3, 11; id. Ep. 3, 4, 74; id. Mil. 2, 3, 74; 3, 1, 17; id. Stich. 1, 2, 56; Ter. And. 1, 2, 9; 4, 2, 17:
maxima voce clamat populus, neque se uni, nec paucis velle parere,
Cic. Rep. 1, 35, 55:
consuesse deos immortalis, quos pro scelere eorum ulcisci velint, etc.,
Caes. B. G. 1, 13:
hic experiri vim virtutemque volo,
Liv. 23, 45, 9.—
c.
= in animo habere, to intend, purpose, mean, design:
ac volui inicere tragulam in nostrum senem,
Plaut. Ps. 1, 4, 14:
eadem quae illis voluisti facere tu, faciunt tibi,
id. Mil. 3, 1, 11; so id. Most. 2, 2, 5:
puerumque clam voluit exstinguere,
Ter. Hec. 5, 1, 23:
necare candem voluit,
Cic. Cael. 13, 31: quid enim ad illum qui te captare vult, utrum [p. 2005] tacentem te irretiat an loquentem? id. Ac. 2, 29, 94:
hostis hostem occidere volui,
Liv. 2, 12, 9; 7, 34, 11: volui interdiu eum... occidere; volui, cum ad cenam invitavi, veneno scilicet tollere;
volui... ferro interficere (ironically),
id. 40, 13, 2:
tuum crimen erit, hospitem occidere voluisse,
the intention to kill your guest-friend, Val. Max. 5, 1, 3 fin.; 6, 1, 8:
non enim vult mori, sed invidiam filio facere,
Quint. 9, 2, 85.—
Pregn., opp. optare: non vult mori qui optat,
Sen. Ep. 117, 24:
sed eo die is, cui dare volueram (epistulam), non est profectus,
Cic. Att. 9, 7, 1:
cum de senectute vellem aliquid scribere,
id. Sen. 1, 2:
ego te volui castigare, tu mihi accussatrix ades,
Plaut. As. 3, 1, 10:
bonus volo jam ex hoc die esse,
id. Pers. 4, 3, 10:
ego jam a principio amici filiam, Ita ut aequom fuerat, volui uxorem ducere,
Ter. Phorm. 4, 3, 46:
at etiam eo negotio M. Catonis splendorem maculare voluerunt,
it was their purpose, Cic. Sest. 28, 60:
eum (tumulum) non tam capere sine certamine volebat, quam causam certaminis cum Minucio contrahere,
his plan was, Liv. 22, 28, 4.—Of things:
cum lex venditionibus occurrere voluit,
when it was the purpose of the law, Dig. 46, 1, 46: sed quid ea drachuma facere vis? Ca. Restim volo Mihi emere... qui me faciam pensilem, Plaut. Ps. 1, 1, 87: Ch. Revorsionem ad terram faciunt vesperi. Ni. Aurum hercle auferre voluere, id. Bacch. 2, 3, 63:
si iis qui haec omnia flamma ac ferro delere voluerunt... bellum indixi, etc.,
Cic. Prov. Cons. 10, 24:
(plebem) per caedem senatus vacuam rem publicam tradere Hannibali velle,
Liv. 23, 2, 7:
rem Nolanam in jus dicionemque dare voluerat Poeno,
id. 23, 15, 9: qui (majores nostri) tanta cura Siculos tueri ac retinere voluerunt ut, etc., whose policy it was to protect, etc., Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 6, § 14:
ut qui a principio mitis omnibus Italicis praeter Romanos videri vellet, etc.,
Liv. 23, 15, 4: idem istuc, si in vilitate largiri voluisses, derisum tuum beneficium esset, if you had offered to grant the same thing during low prices, etc., Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 92, § 215.—
d.
= studere, conari, to try, endeavor, attempt:
quas (i. e. magnas res) qui impedire vult, is et infirmus est mobilisque natura, et, etc.,
Cic. Lael. 20, 75:
nam si quando id (exordium) primum invenire volui, nullum mihi occurrit, nisi aut exile, aut, etc.,
id. Or. 2, 77, 315:
de Antonio dico, numquam illum... nonnullorum de ipso suspitionem infitiando tollere voluisse,
that he never attempted to remove, id. Sest. 3, 8; id. Div. 1, 18, 35:
audes Fatidicum fallere velle deum?
do you dare attempt? Ov. F. 2, 262.—
e.
To mean, of actions and expressions:
hic respondere voluit, non lacessere,
the latter meant to answer, not to provoke, Ter. Phorm. prol. 19:
non te judices urbi sed carceri reservarunt, neque to retinere in civitate, sed exilio privare voluerunt,
Cic. Att. 1, 16, 9.—So, volo dicere, I mean (lit. I intend to say):
quid aliud volui dicere?
Ter. Eun. 3, 2, 51:
volo autem dicere, illud homini longe optimum esse quod ipsum sit optandum per se,
Cic. Tusc. 2, 20, 46.—Often with the acc. illud or id, as a correction: Tr. Specta quam arcte dormiunt. Th. Dormiunt? Tr. Illut quidem ut conivent volui dicere, I mean how they nod, Plaut. Most. 3, 2, 145: Py. Quid? bracchium? Ar. Illud dicere volui femur, id. Mil. 1, 1, 27:
adduxi volui dicere,
id. Ps. 2, 4, 21; id. Am. 1, 1, 233; 1, 1, 235; id. Cas. 2, 6, 14; id. Mil. 3, 2, 7; id. Ps. 3, 2, 54; id. Rud. 2, 4, 9.—
f.
To be going to: haec argumenta ego aedificiis dixi; nunc etiam volo docere ut homines aedium esse similes arbitremini, now I am going to show how, etc., Plaut. Most. 1, 2, 37: quando bene gessi rem, volo hic in fano supplicare, I am going to worship here, etc., id. Curc. 4, 2, 41:
nunc quod relicuom restat volo persolvere,
id. Cist. 1, 3, 40:
sustine hoc, Penicule, exuvias facere quas vovi volo,
id. Men. 1, 3, 13:
sinite me prospectare ne uspiam insidiae sint, consilium quod habere volumus,
id. Mil. 3, 1, 3; id. As. 2, 2, 113; id. Cas. 4, 2, 3; id. Bacch. 1, 1, 61:
si Prometheus, cum mortalibus ignem dividere vellet, ipse a vicinis carbunculos conrogaret, ridiculus videretur,
Auct. Her. 4, 6, 9:
ait se velle de illis HS. LXXX. cognoscere,
Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 23, § 56:
hinc se recipere cum vellent, rursus illi ex loco superiore nostros premebant,
Caes. B. C. 1, 45. —
g.
To be about to, on the point of: quom mittere signum Volt, Enn. ap. Cic. Div. 1, 48, 107 (Ann. v. 88 Vahl.):
quotiens ire volo foras, retines me, rogitas quo ego eam,
Plaut. Men. 1, 2, 5:
quae sese in ignem inicere voluit, prohibui,
Ter. And. 1, 1, 113:
si scires aspidem latere uspiam, et velle aliquem imprudentem super eam adsidere,
Cic. Fin. 2, 18, 59; id. Div. 1, 52, 118:
quod cum facere vellent, intervenit M. Manilius,
id. Rep. 1, 12, 18:
qui cum opem ferre vellet, nuntiatum sibi esse aliam classem ad Aegates insulas stare,
Liv. 22, 56, 7:
at Libys obstantes dum vult obvertere remos, In spatium resilire manus breve vidit,
Ov. M. 3, 676; 1, 635:
P. Claudius cum proelium navale committere vellet,
Val. Max. 1, 4, 3.—
h.
Will, and in oblique discourse and questions would, the auxiliaries of the future and potential: animum advortite: Comediai nomen dari vobis volo, I will give you, etc., Plaut. Cas. prol. 30:
sed, nisi molestum est, nomen dare vobis volo comediai,
id. Poen. prol. 50:
vos ite intro. Interea ego ex hac statua verberea volo erogitare... quid sit factum,
id. Capt. 5, 1, 30:
i tu atque arcessi illam: ego intus quod facto est opus volo adcurare,
id. Cas. 3, 3, 35; id. Cist. 1, 1, 113; id. Most. 1, 1, 63; id. Poen. 2, 44; id. Pers. 1, 3, 85; id. Rud. 1, 2, 33: cum vero (gemitus) nihil imminuat doloris, cur frustra turpes esse volumus? why will ( would) we be disgraceful to no purpose? Cic. Tusc. 2, 24, 57:
illa enim (ars) te, verum si loqui volumus, ornaverat,
id. ib. 1, 47, 112:
ergo, si vere aestimare volumus, etc.,
Val. Max. 7, 5, 6:
si vere aestimare Macedonas, qui tunc erant, volumus,
Curt. 4, 16, 33:
ejus me compotem facere potestis, si meminisse vultis, etc.,
Liv. 7, 40, 5:
visne igitur, dum dies ista venit... interea tu ipse congredi mecum ut, etc....?
id. 8, 7, 7:
volo tibi Chrysippi quoque distinctionem indicare,
Sen. Ep. 9, 14: vis tu homines urbemque feris praeponere silvis? will you prefer, etc., Hor. S. 2, 6, 92; cf. velim and vellem, would, II. A. 2.—
k.
Sometimes volui = mihi placuit, I resolved, concluded (generally, in this meaning, followed by an infinitive clause, v. I. B. 4.):
uti tamen tuo consilio volui,
still I concluded to follow your advice, Cic. Att. 8, 3, 1.—
1.
To be willing, ready, to consent, like to do something: si sine bello velint rapta... tradere... se exercitum domum reducturum, if they were willing, would consent to, would deliver, etc., Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 52:
is dare volt, is se aliquid posci,
likes to give, id. As. 1, 3, 29:
hoc dixit, si hoc de cella concederetur, velle Siculos senatui polliceri frumentum in cellam gratis,
Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 87, § 200:
ei laxiorem daturos, si venire ad causam dicendam vellet,
Liv. 39, 17, 2; 5, 36, 4: nemo invenitur qui pecuniam suam dividere velit. Sen. Brev. Vit. 3, 1:
plerique concessam sibi sub condicione vitam si militare adversus eum vellent, recusarunt,
Suet. Caes. 68:
dedere etiam se volebant, si toleranda viris imperarentur,
Flor. 1, 33 (2, 18), 12.—So with negatives, to be not willing, not to suffer, not to like, not to allow, refuse:
heri nemo voluit Sostratam intro admittere,
Ter. Hec. 3, 1, 49:
cum alter verum audire non vult,
Cic. Lael. 26, 98: a proximis quisque minime anteiri vult, likes least to be surpassed, etc., Liv. 6, 34, 7:
nihil ex his praeter... accipere voluit,
refused to accept, Val. Max. 4, 3, 4.—
m.
To do something voluntarily or intentionally: volo facere = mea voluntate or sponte facio: si voluit accusare, pietati tribuo;
si jussus est, necessitati,
if he accused of his own free will, I ascribe it to his filial love, Cic. Cael. 1, 2:
utrum statuas voluerint tibi statuere, an coacti sint,
id. Verr. 2, 2, 65, § 157:
de risu quinque sunt quae quaerantur... sitne oratoris risum velle permovere,
on purpose, id. Or. 2, 58, 235:
laedere numquam velimus,
Quint. 6, 3, 28.—So, non velle with inf., to do something unwillingly, with reluctance:
vivere noluit qui mori non vult,
who dies with reluctance, Sen. Ep. 30, 10.—
n.
To be of opinion, think, mean, pretend (rare with inf.; usu. with acc. and inf.; v. B. 8.):
haec tibi scripsi ut isto ipso in genere in quo aliquid posse vis, te nihil esse cognosceres,
in which you imagine you have some influence, Cic. Fam. 7, 27, 2:
in hoc homo luteus etiam callidus ac veterator esse vult, quod ita scribit, etc.,
pretends, means to be, id. Verr. 2, 3, 14, § 35: sed idem Aelius Stoicus esse voluit, orator autem nec studuit um quam, nec fuit, id. Brut. 56, 206:
Pythago. ras, qui etiam ipse augur esse vellet,
id. Div. 1, 3, 5.—
o.
To like, have no objection to, approve of (cf. E. 1. sq.):
magis eum delectat qui se ait philosophari velle sed paucis: nam omnino haud placere,
that he liked, had no objection to philosophizing, Cic. Rep. 1, 18, 30; v. also II. A.—
2.
With pres. inf. understood.
a.
Supplied from a preceding or subsequent clause.
(α).
To wish, it is his will, etc. (cf. 1. a. and b. supra):
nunc bene vivo et fortunate atque ut volo, i. e. vivere,
as I wish, Plaut. Mil. 3, 1, 111: quod diu vivendo multa quae non volt (i. e. videre) videt, Caecil. ap. Cic. Sen. 8, 25:
proinde licet quotvis vivendo condere saecla,
Lucr. 3, 1090:
nec tantum proficiebam quantum volebam,
Cic. Att. 1, 17, 1:
tot autem rationes attulit, ut velle (i. e. persuadere) ceteris, sibi certe persuasisse videatur,
id. Tusc. 1, 21, 49:
sed liceret, si velint, in Ubiorum finibus considere,
Caes. B. G. 4, 81:
quo praesidio senatus libere quae vellet decernere auderet,
id. B. C. 1, 2.—Of things:
neque chorda sonum reddit quem vult manus et mens,
Hor. A. P. 348.—
(β).
To choose, be pleased (freq.):
tum mihi faciat quod volt magnus Juppiter,
Plaut. Aul. 4, 10, 50:
id repetundi copia est, quando velis,
id. Trin. 5, 2, 7:
habuit aurum quamdiu voluit,
Cic. Cael. 13, 31:
rapiebat et asportabat quantum a quoque volebat Apronius,
id. Verr. 2, 3, 12, § 29:
provincias quas vellet, quibus vellet, venderet?
id. Sest. 39, 84:
quotiens ille tibi potestatem facturus sit ut eligas utrum velis,
id. Div. in Caecil. 14, 45:
daret utrum vellet subclamatum est,
Liv. 21, 18, 14:
senatus consultum factum est ut plebes praeficeret quaestioni quem vellet,
id. 4, 51, 2:
saxi materiaeque caedendae unde quisque vellet jus factum,
id. 5, 55, 3; cf. id. 2, 13, 9; 5, 46, 10; 6, 25, 5; 22, 10, 23; 23, 6, 2; 23, 15, 15; 23, 45, 10; 23, 47, 2;
26, 21, 11: vicem suam conquestus, quod sibi soli non liceret amicis, quatenus vellet, irasci,
Suet. Aug. 66:
at tu quantum vis tolle,
Hor. Ep. 1, 7, 16.—
(γ).
To intend, it is my purpose, etc. (v. 1. c. supra):
sine me pervenire quo volo,
let me come to my point, Ter. Eun. 1, 2, 44:
scripsi igitur Aristotelio more, quemadmodum quidem volui, tres libros... de Oratore,
as I intended, Cic. Fam. 1, 9, 23:
ut meliore condicione quam qua ipse vult imitetur homines eos qui, etc.,
id. Div. in Caecil. 8, 25:
ego istos posse vincere scio, velle ne scirem ipsi fecerunt,
Liv. 2, 45, 12. —
(δ).
To be willing, to consent, I will (v. 1. h. and l. supra): tu eum orato... St. Sane volo, yes, I will, Plaut. Cas. 2, 3, 57:
jube me vinciri. Volo, dum istic itidem vinciatur,
id. Capt. 3, 4, 75:
patri dic velle (i. e. uxorem ducere),
that you consent, are willing, Ter. And. 2, 3, 20 (cf.: si vis, II. A. 2, and sis, supra init.).—
(ε).
To do something voluntarily (v. 1. m. supra):
tu selige tantum, Me quoque velle velis, anne coactus amem,
Ov. Am. 3, 11, 50.—
b.
With ellipsis of inf.
(α).
Volo, with a designation of place, = ire volo:
nos in Formiano morabamur, quo citius audiremus: deinde Arpinum volebamus,
I intended to go to Arpinum, Cic. Att. 9, 1, 3:
volo mensi Quinctili in Graeciam,
id. ib. 14, 7, 2:
hactenus Vitellius voluerat (i. e. procedere),
Tac. A. 12, 42 fin. —
(β).
With other omissions, supplied from context: volo Dolabellae valde desideranti, non reperio quid (i. e. to dedicate some writing to him), Cic. Att. 13, 13, 2.—
(γ).
In mal. part., Plaut. Aul. 2, 4, 7; Ov. Am. 2, 4, 16; 2. 19, 2; Prop. 1, 13, 36.—
3.
With perfect infinitive active (rare).
a.
In negative imperative sentences dependent on ne velis, ne velit (in oblique discourse also ne vellet), where ne velis has the force of noli. The perfect infinitive emphatically represents the action as completed (ante-class. and poet.).
(α).
In ancient ordinances of the Senate and of the higher officers (not in laws proper): NEIQVIS EORVM BACANAL HABVISE VELET... BACAS VIR NEQVIS ADIESE VELET CEIVIS ROMANVS... NEVE PECVNIAM QVISQVAM EORVM COMOINEM HABVISE VELET... NEVE... QVIQVAM FECISE VELET. NEVE INTER SED CONIOVRASE, NEVE COMVOVISE NEVE CONSPONDISE, etc., S. C. de Bacch. 4-13 ap. Wordsworth, Fragm. and Spec. p. 172.—So, in quoting such ordinances: per totam Italiam edicta mitti ne quis qui Bacchis initiatus esset, coisse aut convenisse causa sacrorum velit. [p. 2006] neu quid talis rei divinae fecisse, Liv. 39, 14, 8:
edixerunt ne quis quid fugae causa vendidisse neve emisse vellet,
id. 39, 17, 3. —
(β).
In imitation of official edicts: (vilicus) ne quid emisse velit insciente domino, neu quid domino celasse velit, the overseer must not buy any thing, etc., Cato, R. R. 5, 4:
interdico, ne extulisse extra aedis puerum usquam velis,
Ter. Hec. 4, 1, 48:
oscula praecipue nulla dedisse velis (= noli dare),
Ov. Am. 1, 4, 38:
ne quis humasse velit Ajacem, Atride, vetas? Cur?
Hor. S. 2, 3, 187.—
b.
In affirmative sentences, implying command (in any mood or tense; mostly poet.): neminem nota strenui aut ignavi militis notasse volui, I have decided to mark no one, etc., Liv. 24, 16, 11: quia pepercisse vobis volunt, committere vos cur pereatis non patiuntur, because they have decided to spare you, etc., id. 32, 21, 33:
sunt delicta tamen quibus ignovisse velimus (= volumus),
which should be pardoned, Hor. A. P. 347.—
c.
To represent the will as referring to a completed action.
(α).
In optative sentences with vellem or velim, v. II. B. 5. b. a, and II. C. 1. b.—
(β).
In other sentences ( poet. and post-class.): ex omnibus praediis ex quibus non hac mente recedimus ut omisisse possessionem velimus, with the will to abandon (omittere would denote the purpose to give up at some future time), Dig. 43, 16, 1, § 25; so,
an erit qui velle recuset Os populi meruisse?
Pers. 1, 41:
qui me volet incurvasse querela,
id. 1, 91.
B.
With acc. and inf.
1.
To wish (v. A. 1. a.).
a.
With a different subject: hoc volo scire te: Perditus sum miser, I wish you to know, etc., Plaut. Curc. 1, 2, 46:
deos volo consilia vostra vobis recte vortere,
id. Trin. 5, 2, 31:
emere oportet quem tibi oboedire velis,
id. Pers. 2, 4, 2:
scin' quid nunc te facere volo?
Ter. Heaut. 3, 1, 85:
si perpetuam vis esse adfinitatem hanc,
id. Hec. 2, 2, 10:
consul ille egit eas res quarum me participem esse voluit,
Cic. Prov. Cons. 17, 41:
vim volumus exstingui: jus valeat necesse est,
id. Sest. 42, 92:
nec mihi hunc errorem extorqueri volo,
id. Sen. 23, 85:
hoc te scire volui,
id. Att. 7, 18, 4:
harum causarum fuit justissima quod Germanos suis quoque rebus timere voluit,
Caes. B. G. 4, 16:
ut equites qui salvam esse rempublicam vellent ex equis desilirent,
Liv. 4, 38, 2:
si me vivere vis recteque videre valentem,
Hor. Ep. 1, 7, 3:
si vis me flere, dolendum est Primum ipsi tibi,
id. A. P. 102.—With pass. inf. impers.:
regnari tamen omnes volebant,
that there should be a king, Liv. 1, 17, 3:
mihi volo ignosci,
I wish to be pardoned, Cic. Or. 1, 28, 130:
volt sibi quisque credi,
Liv. 22, 22, 14. —
b.
With the same subject.
(α).
With inf. act.:
quae mihi est spes qua me vivere velim,
what hope have I, that I should wish to live? Plaut. Rud. 1, 3, 33:
volo me placere Philolachi,
id. Most. 1, 3, 11; cf. id. Trin. 2, 2, 47; id. Rud. 2, 6, 1:
judicem esse me, non doctorem volo,
Cic. Or. 33, 117:
vult, credo, se esse carum suis,
id. Sen. 20, 73; so id. Off. 1, 31, 113; id. de Or. 1, 24, 112; 2, 23, 95. —
(β).
With inf. pass.:
quod certiorem te vis fieri quo quisque in me animo sit,
Cic. Att. 11, 13, 1; cf. id. Fam. 1, 9, 18:
qui se ex his minus timidos existimari volebant,
Caes. B. G. 1, 39; cf. id. B. C. 2, 29:
religionis se causa... Bacchis initiari velle,
Liv. 39, 10, 2:
Agrippae se nepotem neque credi neque dici volebat,
Suet. Calig. 22 fin. —
2.
Of the will of superiors, gods, etc. (cf. A. 1. b. supra), I want, it is my will:
me absente neminem volo intromitti,
Plaut. Aul. 1, 3, 21:
viros nostros quibus tu voluisti esse nos matres familias,
id. Stich. 1, 2, 41; id. Most. 1, 4, 2; id. Rud. 4, 5, 9; id. Trin. 1, 2, 1:
pater illum alterum (filium) secum omni tempore volebat esse,
Cic. Rosc. Am. 15, 42:
(deus) quinque reliquis motibus orbem esse voluit expertem,
id. Univ. 10; cf. id. Sest. 69, 147; id. Verr. 2, 4, 25, § 57; 1, 5, 14:
causa mittendi fuit quod iter per Alpes... patefieri volebat,
Caes. B. G. 3, 1; cf. id. ib. 5, 9; id. B. C. 1, 4:
quippe (senatus) foedum hominem a republica procul esse volebat,
Sall. C. 19, 2:
nec (di) patefieri (crimina) ut impunita essent, sed ut vindicarentur voluerunt,
Liv. 39, 16, 11; cf. id. 1, 56, 3; 2, 28, 5; 25, 32, 6:
senatus... Romano sanguini pudicitiam tutam esse voluit,
Val. Max. 6, 1, 9; cf. id. 6, 9, 2.—So in the historians: quid fieri vellet (velit), after a verbum imperandi or declarandi, he gave his orders, explained his will:
quid fieri velit praecipit,
Caes. B. G. 5, 56:
ibi quid fieri vellet imperabat,
id. ib. 7, 16:
quid fieri vellet ostendit,
id. ib. 7, 27:
quae fieri vellet edocuit,
id. B. C. 3, 108; cf. id. B. G. 7, 45; id. B. C. 3, 78; 3, 89:
quid fieri vellet edixit,
Curt. 8, 10, 30; 4, 13, 24; Val. Max. 7, 4, 2.— Frequently majores voluerunt, it was the will of our ancestors, referring to ancient customs and institutions:
sacra Cereris summa majores nostri religione confici caerimoniaque voluerunt,
Cic. Balb. 24, 55: majores vestri ne vos quidem temere coire voluerunt, cf. id. ib. 17, 39; 23, 54; id. Agr. 2, 11, 26; id. Fl. 7, 15; id. Imp. Pomp. 13, 39; id. Div. 1, 45, 103; id. Font. 24, 30 (10, 20); id. Rosc. Am. 25, 70.—Of testamentary dispositions: cum Titius, heres meus, mortuus erit, volo hereditatem meam ad P. Mevium pertinere, Gai Inst. 2, 277. Except in the institution of the first heir: at illa (institutio) non est comprobata: Titum heredem esse volo, Gai Inst. 2, 117. —
3.
Of the intention of a writer, etc., to want, to mean, intend:
Asinariam volt esse (nomen fabulae) si per vos licet,
Plaut. As. prol. 12:
Plautus hanc mihi gnatam esse voluit Inopiam,
has wanted Poverty to be my daughter, made her my daughter, id. Trin. prol. 9:
primumdum huic esse nomen Diphilus Cyrenas voluit,
id. Rud. prol. 33:
quae ipsi qui scripserunt voluerunt vulgo intellegi,
meant to be understood by all, Cic. Or. 2, 14, 60:
si non hoc intellegi volumus,
id. Fat. 18, 41:
quale intellegi vult Cicero cum dicit orationem suam coepisse canescere,
Quint. 11, 1, 31; so id. 9, 4, 82; 9, 3, 9:
quamquam illi (Prometheo) quoque ferreum anulum dedit antiquitas vinculumque id, non gestamen, intellegi voluit,
Plin. 33, 1, 4, § 8.—
4.
To resolve:
Siculi... me defensorem calamitatum suarum... esse voluerunt,
Cic. Div. in Caecil. 4, 11:
si a me causam hanc vos (judices) agi volueritis,
if you resolve, id. ib. 8, 25:
senatus te voluit mihi nummos, me tibi frumentum dare,
id. Verr. 2, 3, 85, § 196:
qua (statua) abjecta, basim tamen in foro manere voluerunt,
id. ib. 2, 2, 66, §
160: liberam debere esse Galliam quam (senatus) suis legibus uti voluisset,
Caes. B. G. 1, 45:
tu Macedonas tibi voluisti genua ponere, venerarique te ut deum,
Curt. 8 (7), 13.— Hence,
5.
To order, command: erus meus tibi me salutem multam voluit dicere, has ordered me, etc., Plaut. Ps. 4, 2, 25:
montem quem a Labieno occupari voluerit,
which he had ordered to be occupied, Caes. B. G. 1, 22:
ibi futuros esse Helvetios ubi eos Caesar... esse voluisset,
id. ib. 1, 13 (for velitis jubeatis with inf.-clause, v. II. B. 5. d.).—
6.
To consent, allow (cf. A. 1. I.):
obtinuere ut (tribuni) tribuniciae potestatis vires salubres vellent reipublicae esse,
they prevailed upon them to permit the tribunitian power to be wholesome to the republic, Liv. 2, 44, 5:
Hiero tutores... puero reliquit quos precatus est moriens ut juvenum suis potissimum vestigiis insistere vellent,
id. 24, 4, 5:
petere ut eum... publicae etiam curae ac velut tutelae vellent esse (i. e. senatus),
id. 42, 19, 5:
orare tribunos ut uno animo cum consulibus bellum ab urbe ac moenibus propulsari vellent,
id. 3, 69, 5:
quam superesse causam Romanis cur non... incolumis Syracusas esse velint?
id. 25, 28, 8:
si alter ex heredibus voluerit rem a legatario possideri, alter non, ei qui noluit interdictum competet,
Dig. 43, 3, 1, § 15.—So negatively = not to let, not to suffer:
cum P. Attio agebant ne sua pertinacia omnium fortunas perturbari vellet,
Caes. B. C. 2, 36.—
7.
To be of opinion that something should be, to require, demand:
voluisti enim in suo genere unumquemque... esse Roscium,
Cic. Or. 1, 61, 258: eos exercitus quos contra se multos jam annos aluerint velle dimitti, he demanded the disbanding of, etc., Caes. B. C. 1, 85:
(Cicero) vult esse auctoritatem in verbis,
Quint. 8, 3, 43:
vult esse Celsus aliquam et superiorem compositionem,
id. 9, 4, 137:
si tantum irasci vis sapientem quantum scelerum indignitas exigit,
Sen. Ira, 2, 9, 4. —
8.
To be of opinion that something is or was, = censere, dicere, but implying that the opinion is erroneous or doubtful, usu. in the third pers., sometimes in the second.
(α).
To imagine, consider:
est genus hominum qui esse se primos omnium rerum volunt, Nec sunt,
Ter. Eun. 2, 2, 17:
semper auget adsentator id quod is cujus ad voluntatem dicitur vult esse magnum,
Cic. Lael. 26, 98:
si quis patricius, si quis—quod illi volunt invidiosius esse—Claudius diceret,
Liv. 6, 40, 13.—
(β).
To be of opinion, to hold:
vultis, opinor, nihil esse... in natura praeter ignem,
Cic. N. D. 3, 14, 36:
volunt illi omnes... eadem condicione nasci,
id. Div. 2, 44, 93:
vultis evenire omnia fato,
id. ib. 2, 9, 24:
alteri censent, etc., alteri volunt a rebus fatum omne relegari,
id. Fat. 19, 45:
vultis a dis immortalibus hominibus dispertiri somnia,
id. N. D. 3, 39, 93; id. Tusc. 1, 10, 20; id. Fin. 3, 11, 36; id. Rep. 2, 26, 48:
volunt quidam... iram in pectore moveri effervescente circa cor sanguine,
Sen. Ira, 2, 19, 3.—
(γ).
To say, assert:
si tam familiaris erat Clodiae quam tu esse vis,
as you say he is, Cic. Cael. 21, 53:
sit sane tanta quanta tu illam esse vis,
id. Or. 1, 55, 23:
ad pastum et ad procreandi voluptatem hoc divinum animal procreatum esse voluerunt: quo nihil mihi videtur esse absurdius,
id. Fin. 2, 13, 40; 2, 17, 55; 2, 42, 131; 2, 46, 142; id. Fat. 18, 41.—With perf. inf.:
Rhodi ego non fui: me vult fuisse,
Cic. Planc. 34, 84.—
(δ).
To pretend, with perf. inf., both subjects denoting the same person:
unde homines dum se falso terrore coacti Effugisse volunt, etc.,
Lucr. 3, 69 (cf. A. 1. n. supra).—
(ε).
To mean, with perf. inf.:
utrum scientem vultis contra foedera fecisse, an inscientem?
Cic. Balb. 5, 13.— With pres. inf.:
quam primum istud, quod esse vis?
what do you mean by as soon as possible? Sen. Ep. 117, 24.—
(ζ).
Rarely in the first pers., implying that the opinion is open to discussion:
ut et mihi, quae ego vellem non esse oratoris, concederes,
what according to my opinion is not the orator's province, Cic. Or. 1, 17, 74.—
9.
In partic.
a.
With things as subjects.
(α).
Things personified:
ne res publica quidem haec pro se suscipi volet,
would have such things done for it, Cic. Off. 1, 45, 159:
cui tacere grave sit, quod homini facillimum voluerit esse natura,
which nature willed should be easiest for man, Curt. 4, 6, 6: fortuna Q. Metellum... nasci in urbe terrarum principe voluit, fate ordained that, etc., Val. Max. 7, 1, 1: nihil rerum ipsa natura voluit magnum effici cito, it is the law of nature that, etc., Quint. 10, 3, 4:
quid non ingenio voluit natura licere?
what license did nature refuse to genius? Mart. 8, 68, 9:
me sine, quem semper voluit fortuna jacere,
Prop. 1, 6, 25:
hanc me militiam fata subire volunt,
id. 1, 6, 30.—
(β).
Of laws, to provide:
duodecim tabulae nocturnum furem... interfici impune voluerunt,
Cic. Mil. 3, 9:
lex duodecim tabularum tignum aedibus junctum... solvi prohibuit, pretiumque ejus dari voluit,
Dig. 46, 3, 98, § 8 fin. (cf. Cic. Div. in Caecil. 6, 21, b. a, infra).—
b.
With perf. pass. inf., to represent a state or result wished for.
(α).
The inf. being in full, with esse expressed: si umquam quemquam di immortales voluere esse auxilio adjutum, tum me et Calidorum servatum volunt, if it ever was the will of the gods that any one should be assisted, etc., Plaut. Ps. 4, 1, 1: Corinthum patres vestri, totius Graeciae lumen, exstinctum esse voluerunt, it was their will that Corinth should be ( and remain) destroyed, Cic. Imp. Pomp. 5, 11:
nostri... leges et jura tecta esse voluerunt,
id. Or. 1, 59, 253:
propter eam partem epistulae tuae per quam te et mores tuos purgatos et probatos esse voluisti,
id. Att. 1, 17, 7; id. Fin. 4, 27, 76; id. de Or. 1, 51, 221:
daturum se operam ne cujus suorum popularium mutatam secum fortunam esse vellent,
Liv. 21, 45, 6: for velle redundant in this construction, v. II. A. 2. 3. infra.—With pass. inf. impers.:
sociis maxime lex consultum esse vult,
Cic. Div. in Caecil. 6, 21.—
(β).
With ellips. of esse (cf. Quint. 9, 3, 9): perdis me tuis dictis. Cu. Imo, servo et servatum volo, and mean that you should remain saved, Plaut. Curc. 2, 3, 56:
aunt qui volum te conventam,
who want to see you, id. Cist. 4, 2, 39:
eidem homini, si quid recte cura tum velis, mandes,
if you want to have anything done well, id. As. 1, 1, 106:
sed etiam est paucis vos quod monitos voluerim,
id. Capt. prol. 53: id nunc res indicium haeo [p. 2007] facit, quo pacto factum volueris, this shows now why you wished this to be done, Ter. Hec. 4, 1, 31 (cf. Plaut. Stich. 4, 2, 33; id. Aul. 3, 5, 30, II. B. 1, b, and II. B. 3. b. infra): domestica cura te levatum volo, I wish to see you relieved, etc., Cic. Q. Fr. 3, 9, 3:
nulla sedes quo concurrant qui rem publicam defensam velint,
id. Att. 8, 3, 4:
rex celatum voluerat (i. e. donum),
id. Verr. 2, 4, 28, § 64:
Hannibal non Capuam neglectam, neque desertos volebat socios,
Liv. 25, 20, 5; 2, 15, 2; 2, 44, 3; 3, 21, 4; 22, 7, 4;
26, 31, 6: contemptum hominis quem destructum volebat,
Quint. 8, 3, 21:
si te non emptam vellet, emendus erat,
Ov. Am. 1, 8, 34 (so with velle redundant, v. II. A. 1. d., and II. A. 3. infra).—Both subjects denoting the same person:
velle Pompeium se Caesari purgatum,
Caes. B. C. 1, 8.— Esp., with pass. inf. impers.: alicui consultum velle, to take care for or advocate somebody's interests:
liberis consultum volumus propter ipsos,
Cic. Fin. 3, 17, 57:
obliviscere illum aliquando adversario tuo voluisse consultum,
id. Att. 16, 16 C, 10:
quibus tribuni plebis nunc consultum repente volunt,
Liv. 5, 5, 3; so id. 25, 25, 17:
quamquam senatus subventum voluit heredibus,
Dig. 36, 1, 1, § 4; so with dep. part., used passively:
volo amori ejus obsecutum,
Plaut. As. 1, 1, 63.—
c.
With predic. adj., without copula.
(α).
The subjects being different (mostly aliquem salvum velle):
si me vivum vis, pater, Ignosce,
if you wish me to live, Ter. Heaut. 5, 5, 7:
ille, si me alienus adfinem volet, Tacebit,
id. Phorm. 4, 1, 16:
ut tu illam salvam magis velis quam ego,
id. Hec. 2, 2, 17; 3, 5, 14:
quoniam ex tota provincia soli sunt qui te salvum velint,
Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 67, § 150:
irent secum extemplo qui rempublicam salvam vellent,
Liv. 22, 53, 7.—
(β).
Both subjects denoting the same person (virtually = object infinitive):
in occulto jacebis quom te maxime clarum voles (= clarus esse voles),
when you will most wish to be famous, Plaut. Trin. 3, 2, 38:
volo me patris mei similem,
I wish to be like my father, id. As. 1, 1, 54: ut iste qui se vult dicacem et mehercule est, Appius, who means to be witty, etc., Cic. Or. 2, 60, 246:
qui vero se populares volunt,
who mean to be popular, id. Off. 2, 22, 78:
ut integrum se salvumque velit,
id. Fin. 2, 11, 33:
ut (omne animal) se et salvum in suo genere incolumeque vellet,
id. ib. 4, 8, 19. —
d.
With an inf.-clause understood.
(α).
Velle, to wish: utinam hinc abierit in malam crucem! Ad. Ita nos velle aequom est (ita = eum abire, etc.), Plaut. Poen. 4, 1, 5:
stulta es, soror, magis quam volo (i.e. te esse),
id. Pers. 4, 4, 78; id. Trin. 1, 2, 8; 2, 4, 175; id. Stich. 1, 1, 13; id. Ps. 1, 5, 55:
senatum non quod sentiret, sed quod ego vellem decernere,
Cic. Mil. 5, 12:
neque enim facile est ut irascatur cui tu velis judex (= cui tu eum irasci velis),
id. Or. 2, 45, 190; cf. id. Sest. 38, 82.—
(β).
Referring to the will of superiors, etc.:
deos credo voluisse, nam ni vellent, non fieret,
Plaut. Aul. 4, 10, 46: jamne abeo? St. Volo (sc. te abire), so I will, id. Cas. 2, 8, 57; cf. id. Mil. 4, 6, 12; id. Merc. 2, 3, 33.—
(γ).
To mean, intend (v. B. 3.):
acutum etiam illud est cum ex alterius oratione aliud atque ille vult (sc. te excipere),
Cic. Or. 2, 67, 273.—
(δ).
To require, demand (v B. 7.):
veremur quidem vos, Romani, et, si ita vultis, etiam timemus,
Liv. 39, 37, 17;
and of things as subjects: cadentque vocabula, si volet usus (i. e. ea cadere),
Hor. A. P. 71.—
(ε).
To be of opinion, will have (v. B. 8.):
ergo ego, inimicus, si ita vultis, homini, amicus esse rei publicae debeo,
Cic. Prov. Cons. 8, 19:
nam illi regi tolerabili, aut, si voltis, etiam amabili, Cyro,
id. Rep. 1, 28, 44; id. Fin. 2, 27, 89; 3, 4, 12; id. Cael. 21, 53; Liv. 21, 10, 7; Quint. 2, 17, 41.—
(ζ).
With ellips. of predic. inf. (v. A. 2. b.): cras de reliquiis nos volo (i. e. cenare), it is my intention that we dine, etc., Plaut. Stich. 3, 2, 40:
volo Varronem (i. e. hos libros habere),
Cic. Att. 13, 25, 3.
C.
With ut, ne, or ut ne.
1.
With ut.
a.
To wish:
volo ut quod jubebo facias,
Plaut. Bacch. 4, 8, 65:
quia enim id maxime volo ut illi istac confugiant,
id. Most. 5, 1, 49:
ut mihi aedes aliquas conducat volo,
id. Merc. 3, 2, 17: hoc prius volo meam rem agere. Th. Quid id est? Ph. Ut mihi hanc despondeas, id. Curc. 5, 2, 71: quid vis, nisi ut maneat Phanium? Ter. Phorm. 2, 2, 8:
velim ut tibi amicus sit,
Cic. Att. 10, 16, 1:
quare id quoque velim... ut sit qui utamur,
id. ib. 11, 11, 2:
maxime vellem, judices, ut P. Sulla... modestiae fructum aliquem percipere potuisset,
id. Sull. 1, 1:
equidem vellem uti pedes haberent (res tuae),
id. Fam. 7, 33, 2:
his ut sit digna puella volo,
Mart. 11, 27, 14.—Both subjects denoting the same person: volueram, inquit, ut quam plurimum tecum essem, Brut. ap. Cic. Att. 13, 38, 1.—
b.
It is the will of, to want, ordain (v. B. 2.):
at ego deos credo voluisse ut apud te me in nervo enicem,
Plaut. Aul. 4, 10, 17: numquid me vis? Le. Ut valeas, id. Cist. 1, 1, 120: numquid vis? Ps. Dormitum ut abeas, id. Ps. 2, 2, 70:
volo ut mihi respondeas,
Cic. Vatin. 6, 14; 7, 17; 7, 18; 9, 21;
12, 29: nuntia Romanis, caelestes ita velle ut mea Roma caput orbis terrarum sit,
Liv. 1, 16, 7.—
c.
To intend, it is the purpose, aim, etc., the two subjects being the same:
id quaerunt, volunt haec ut infecta faciant,
Plaut. Cas. 4, 4, 9.—
d.
With other verbs:
quod peto et volo parentes meos ut commonstres mihi,
Ter. Heaut. 5, 4, 4:
quasi vero aut populus Romanus hoc voluerit, aut senatus tibi hoc mandaverit ut... privares,
Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 19, § 48;
with opto,
id. Imp. Pomp. 16, 48;
with laboro,
Liv. 42, 14, 3;
with aequum censere,
id. 39, 19, 7.—
2.
With ne:
at ne videas velim,
Plaut. Rud. 4, 4, 23:
quid nunc vis? ut opperiare hos sex dies saltem modo, ne illam vendas, neu me perdas, etc.,
id. Ps. 1, 3, 102:
credibile est hoc voluisse legumlatorem, ne auxilia liberorum innocentibus deessent,
intended, Quint. 7, 1, 56.—
3.
With ut ne: quid nunc tibi vis? Mi. Ut quae te cupit, eam ne spernas, Plaut. Mil. 4, 2, 60.
D.
With subjunct. of dependent verb (mostly ante-class.; class. and freq. with velim and vellem; but in Cic. mostly epistolary and colloquial).
1.
To wish:
ergo animum advortas volo,
Plaut. Capt. 2, 3, 23; 2, 3, 28; 2, 3, 70:
volo amet me patrem,
id. As. 1, 1, 63 dub.:
hoc volo agatis,
id. Cist. 1, 1, 83:
ducas volo hodie uxorem,
Ter. And. 2, 3, 14:
quid vis faciam?
Plaut. Merc. 1, 2, 49; Ter. Eun. 5, 8, 24; Plaut. Mil. 2, 3, 64; 2, 3, 65; 2, 6, 65; 3, 3, 3; id. Ps. 4, 1, 17; 4, 7, 19; id. Cas. 2, 3, 56; id. Capt. 1, 2, 12; id. Poen. 3, 2, 16; id. Pers. 2, 4, 23; id. Rud. 5, 2, 45; 5, 3, 58; id. Stich. 5, 2, 21; Ter. Heaut. 4, 6, 14:
volo etiam exquiras quam diligentissime poteris quid Lentulus agat?
Cic. Att. 8, 12, 6:
Othonem vincas volo,
id. ib. 13, 29, 2:
eas litteras volo habeas,
id. ib. 13, 32, 3:
visne igitur videamus quidnam sit, etc.,
id. Rep. 1, 10, 15: visne igitur descendatur ad Lirim? id. Fragm. ap. Macr. S. 6, 4:
volo, inquis, sciat,
Sen. Ben. 2, 10, 2.—
2.
To be of opinion that something should be, demand, require (v. B. 7.): volo enim se efferat in adulescentia fecunditas, I like to see, etc., Cic. Or. 2, 21, 88:
volo hoc oratori contingat ut, etc.,
id. Brut. 84, 290.—
3.
With subj.-clause understood:
abi atque obsona, propera! sed lepide volo (i. e. obsones),
Plaut. Cas. 2, 8, 55.
E.
With object nouns, etc.
1.
With acc. of a thing.
a.
With a noun, to want, wish for, like to have:
voltisne olivas, aut pulmentum, aut capparim?
Plaut. Curc. 1, 1, 90:
animo male est: aquam velim,
id. Am. 5, 1, 6:
quia videt me suam amicitiam velle,
id. Aul. 2, 3, 68; so,
gratiam tuam,
id. Curc. 2, 3, 52; 2, 3, 56:
aquam,
id. ib. 2, 3, 34:
discidium,
Ter. And. 4, 2, 14: nullam ego rem umquam in vita mea Volui quin tu in ea re mihi advorsatrix fueris, I never had any wish in my life, etc., id. Heaut. 5, 3, 5: (dixit) velle Hispaniam, he wanted Spain, i. e. as a province, Cic. Att. 12, 7, 1:
mihi frumento non opus est: nummos volo,
I want the money, id. Verr. 2, 3, 85, § 196:
non poterat scilicet negare se velle pacem,
id. Att. 15, 1 a, 3; cf. id. ib. 13, 32, 2 (v. II. C. 4. infra):
si amplius obsidum (= plures obsides) vellet, dare pollicentur,
Caes. B. G. 6, 9 fin.:
pacem etiam qui vincere possunt, volunt,
Liv. 7, 40, 18:
ferunt (eum)... honestum finem voluisse,
Tac. A. 6, 26:
cum Scipio veram vellet et sine exceptione victoriam,
Flor. 1, 33 (2, 18), 12:
mensae munera si voles secundae, Marcentes tibi porrigentur uvae,
Mart. 5, 78, 11.—
b.
Neutr. adjj., denoting things, substantively used: utrum vis opta, dum licet. La. Neutrum volo, Plaut. Ps. 3, 6, 16:
quorum isti neutrum volunt,
acknowledge neither, Cic. Fat. 12, 28:
voluimus quaedam, contendimus... Obtenta non sunt,
we aspired to certain things, id. Balb. 27, 61:
restat ut omnes unum velint,
hold one opinion, id. Marcell. 10, 32:
si plura velim,
if I wished for more, Hor. C. 3, 16, 38:
per quod probemus aliud legislatorem voluisse,
that the law-giver intended something different, Quint. 7, 6, 8:
ut putent, aliud quosdam dicere, aliud velle,
that they say one thing and mean another, id. 9, 2, 85:
utrum is qui scripsit... voluerit,
which of the two was meant by the author, id. 7, 9, 15:
ut nemo contra id quod vult dicit, ita potest melius aliquid velle quam dicit,
mean better than he speaks, id. 9, 2, 89:
quis enim pudor omnia velle?
to desire every thing, Mart. 12, 94, 11.—
c.
With neutr. demonstr. expressed or understood, to want, intend, aim at, like, will:
immo faenus: id primum volo,
Plaut. Most. 3, 1, 64:
proximum quod sit bono... id volo,
id. Capt. 2, 2, 22:
nisi ea quae tu vis volo,
unless my purpose is the same as yours, id. Ep. 2, 2, 82:
siquidem id sapere'st, velle te id quod non potest contingere,
Ter. Heaut. 2, 3, 83:
hoc (i. e. otium cum dignitate) qui volunt omnes optimates putantur,
who aim at this, Cic. Sest. 45, 98:
privatum oportet in re publica ea velle quae tranquilla et honesta sint,
id. Off. 1, 34, 124:
quid est sapientia? Semper idem velle atque idem nolle,
Sen. Ep. 20, 5:
pudebit eadem velle quae volueras puer,
id. ib. 27, 2:
nec volo quod cruciat, nec volo quod satiat,
Mart. 1, 57, 4.—With demonstr. in place of inf.-clause:
hoc Ithacus velit, et magno mercentur Atridae (sc. poenas in me sumi),
Verg. A. 2, 104:
hoc velit Eurystheus, velit hoc germana Tonantis (sc. verum esse, Herculem, etc.),
Ov. H. 9, 7; Hor. S. 2, 3, 88.—
d.
With neutr. of interrog. pron.: quid nunc vis? Am. Sceleste, at etiam quid velim, id tu me rogas? what do you want now? Plaut. Am. 4, 2, 5:
eloquere quid velis,
id. Cas. 2, 4, 2: heus tu! Si. Quid vis? id. Ps. 4, 7, 21; so Ter. Eun. 2, 1, 11; cf. Hor. S. 2, 3, 152:
sed plane quid velit nescio,
what his intentions are, Cic. Att. 15, 1 a, 5; id. de Or. 2, 20, 84:
mittunt etiam ad dominos qui quaerant quid velint,
to ask for their orders, id. Tusc. 2, 17, 41:
quid? Si haec... ipsius amici judicarunt? Quid amplius vultis?
what more do you require, will you have? id. Verr. 2, 3, 65, § 152:
quid amplius vis?
Hor. Epod. 17, 30:
spectatur quid voluerit scriptor,
we find out the author's intention, Quint. 7, 10, 1.—Sometimes quid vult = quid sibi vult (v. 4. b.), to mean, signify:
capram illam suspicor jam invenisse... quid voluerit,
what it signified, Plaut. Merc. 2, 1, 30:
sed tamen intellego quid velit,
Cic. Fin. 2, 31, 101:
quid autem volunt ea di immortales significantes quae sine interpretibus non possimus intellegere? etc.,
id. Div. 2, 25, 54.—Of things as subjects:
hunc ensem mittit tibi... Et jubet ex merito scire quid iste velit,
Ov. H. 11, 96.—
e.
With rel. pron.:
quod volui, ut volui, impetravi... a Philocomasio,
Plaut. Mil. 4, 5, 1:
ut quod frons velit oculi sciant,
that the eyes know what the forehead wants, id. Aul. 4, 1, 13:
illi quae volo concedere,
to yield to him my wishes, id. Cas. 2, 3, 49:
si illud quod volumus dicitur,
what we like, id. Truc. 1, 2, 95:
multa eveniunt homini quae volt, quae nevolt,
id. Trin. 2, 2, 84; id. Ep. 2, 2, 4:
quamquam (litterae tuae) semper aliquid adferunt quod velim,
Cic. Att. 11, 11, 1:
quae vellem quaeque sentirem dicendi,
id. Marcell. 1, 1:
uti ea quae vellent impetrarent,
Caes. B. G. 1, 31:
satis animi ad id quod tam diu vellent,
to carry out what they had desired so long, Liv. 4, 54, 5:
sed quod volebant non... expediebant,
their purpose, id. 24, 23, 9. —Idiomatically: quod volo = quod demonstrare volo, what I intend to prove:
illud quod volumus expressum est, ut vaticinari furor vera soleat,
Cic. Div. 1, 31, 67:
bis sumpsit quod voluit,
he has twice begged the question, id. ib. 2, 52, 107.—With indef. relations:
cornucopia ubi inest quidquid volo,
whatever I wish for, Plaut. Ps. 2, 3, 5:
Caesar de Bruto solitus est dicere: magni refert hic quid velit, sed quidquid volt, valde volt,
whatever he wills he wills strongly, Cic. Att. 14, 1, 2.—
f.
With indef. pronn.
(α).
Si quid vis, if you want any thing: illo praesente mecum agito si quid voles, [p. 2008] Plaut. Most. 5, 1, 72: Py. Adeat si quid volt. Pa. Si quid vis, adi, mulier, id. Mil. 4, 2, 47:
eumque Alexander cum rogaret, si quid vellet, ut diceret,
id. Or. 2, 66, 266; Caes. B. G. 1, 7 fin. —
(β).
Nisi quid vis, unless you wish to give some order, to make some remark, etc.:
ego eo ad forum nisi quid vis,
Plaut. As. 1, 1, 94:
nunc de ratione videamus, nisi quid vis ad haec,
Cic. Tusc. 2, 18, 42.—
(γ).
Numquid vis or ecquid vis? have you any orders to give? a formula used by inferiors before leaving their superiors; cf. Don. ad Ter. Ad. 2, 2, 39:
visunt, quid agam, ecquid velim,
Plaut. Mil. 3, 1, 113:
numquid vis aliud?
Ter. Eun. 1, 2, 111; 1, 2, 106; id. Ad. 2, 2, 39; 3, 3, 78; id. Hec. 2, 2, 30:
numquid vellem rogavit,
Cic. Att. 6, 3, 6:
frequentia rogantium num quid vellet,
Liv. 6, 34, 7:
rogavit num quid in Sardiniam vellet. Te puto saepe habere qui num quid Romam velis quaerant,
Cic. Q. Fr. 2, 2, 1.—
2.
With acc. of the person: aliquem velle.
(α).
To want somebody, i. e. in order to see him, to speak with him (ante-class. and colloq.):
Demenaetum volebam,
I wanted, wished to see, Demenoetus, Plaut. As. 2, 3, 12:
bona femina et malus masculus volunt te,
id. Cist. 4, 2, 40:
solus te solum volo,
id. Capt. 3, 4, 70:
quia non est intus quem ego volo,
id. Mil. 4, 6, 40:
hae oves volunt vos,
id. Bacch. 5, 2, 24:
quis me volt? Perii, pater est,
Ter. And. 5, 3, 1:
centuriones trium cohortium me velle postridie,
Cic. Att. 10, 16, 4.—With paucis verbis or paucis, for a few words ( moments):
volo te verbis pauculis,
Plaut. Ep. 3, 4, 28:
sed paucis verbis te volo, Palaestrio,
id. Mil. 2, 4, 22:
Sosia, Adesdum, paucis te volo,
Ter. And. 1, 1, 2.—
(β).
To love, like somebody, to be fond of somebody (anteclass. and poet.):
hanc volo (= amo),
Plaut. As. 5, 1, 18:
sine me amare unum Argyrippum... quem volo,
id. ib. 3, 2, 38:
quom quae te volt, eamdem tu vis,
id. Mil. 4, 2, 80:
aut quae (vitia) corpori' sunt ejus siquam petis ac vis,
Lucr. 4, 1152:
quam volui nota fit arte mea,
Ov. Am. 1, 10, 60: nolo virum, facili redimit qui sanguine famam: hunc volo, laudari qui sine morte potest, I like the one who, etc., Mart. 1, 8, 6.—
(γ).
To wish to have:
roga, velitne an non uxorem,
whether he wishes to have his wife or not, Ter. Hec. 4, 1, 43:
ut sapiens velit gerere rem publicam, atque... uxorem adjungere, et velle ex ea liberos (anacoluth.),
Cic. Fin. 3, 20, 68.—
With two accusatives: (narrato) illam te amare et velle uxorem,
that you wish to have her as your wife, Ter. Heaut. 4, 3, 25; cf. id. Phorm. 1, 2, 65.—
3.
With two accusatives, of the person and the thing: aliquem aliquid velle, to want something of somebody (cf.: aliquem aliquid rogare; mostly ante-class.;
not in Cic.): numquid me vis?
Plaut. Cist. 1, 1, 120:
face certiorem me quid meus vir me velit,
id. Cas. 2, 6, 1:
num quidpiam me vis aliud?
id. Truc. 2, 4, 81:
nunc verba in pauca conferam quid te velim,
id. As. 1, 1, 74:
narrabit ultro quid sese velis,
id. Ps. 2, 4, 60:
quid me voluisti?
id. Mil. 4, 2, 35:
numquid aliud me vis?
Ter. Phorm. 1, 2, 101:
quin tu uno verbo dic quid est quod me velis,
id. And. 1, 1, 18; Plaut. Capt. 3, 4, 85; id. Cist. 2, 3, 49; id. As. 2, 3, 12; id. Merc. 5, 2, 27; id. Pers. 4, 6, 11; Ter. Heaut. 4, 8, 31; id. Phorm. 2, 4, 18; id. Eun. 2, 3, 47; id. Hec. 3, 4, 15:
si quid ille se velit, illum ad se venire oportere,
Caes. B. G. 1, 34:
cum mirabundus quidnam (Taurea) sese vellet, resedisset Flaccus, Me quoque, inquit, etc.,
Liv. 26, 15, 11; also, I want to speak with somebody (v. 2. a. a):
paucis, Euclio, est quod te volo,
Plaut. Aul. 2, 2, 22:
est quod te volo secreto,
id. Bacch. 5, 2, 33.—
4.
With acc. of thing and dat. of the person: aliquid alicui velle, to wish something to somebody (= cupio aliquid alicui; v. cupio;
rare): quamquam vobis volo quae voltis, mulieres,
Plaut. Rud. 4, 4, 1:
si ex me illa liberos vellet sibi,
Ter. Hec. 4, 4, 33:
praesidium velle se senectuti suae,
id. ib. 1, 2, 44:
nihil est mali quod illa non initio filio voluerit, optaverit,
Cic. Clu. 66, 188:
rem Romanam huc provectam ut externis quoque gentibus quietem velit,
Tac. A. 12, 11:
cui ego omnia meritissimo volo et debeo,
to whom I give and owe my best wishes, Quint. 9, 2, 35.—Esp., in the phrase quid vis (vult) with reflex. dat. of interest, lit. what do you want for yourself?
a.
Quid tibi vis = quid vis, the dat. being redundant (rare):
quid aliud tibi vis?
what else do you want? Ter. Heaut. 2, 3, 90.—With quisque:
haud ita vitam agerent ut nunc plerumque videmus Quid sibi quisque velit nescire,
be ignorant as to their own aims and purposes, Lucr. 3, 1058.—
b.
What do you mean? what do you drive at? what is your scope, object, drift (rare in post-Aug. writers; Don. ad Ter. Eun. prol. 45, declares it an archaism).
(α).
In 1 st pers. (rare):
nunc quid processerim huc, et quid mihi voluerim dicam,
and what I meant thereby, what was the purpose of my coming, Plaut. As. prol. 6:
quid mihi volui? quid mihi nunc prodest bona voluntas?
Sen. Ben. 4, 21, 6.—
(β).
In 2 d pers.:
quid nunc tibi vis, mulier, memora,
what is the drift of your talk? Plaut. Mil. 4, 2, 60: sed quid nunc tibi vis? what do you want to come at (i.e. by your preamble)? id. Poen. 1, 1, 24: quid tu tibi vis? Ego non tangam meam? what do you mean? i. e. what is your purpose? Ter. Eun. 4, 7, 28:
quid tibi vis? quid cum illa rei tibi est?
id. ib. 4, 7, 34:
quid est quod sic gestis? quid sibi hic vestitus quaerit? Quid est quod laetus sis? quid tibi vis?
what do you mean by all this? id. ib. 3, 5, 11:
quid est, inepta? quid vis tibi? quid rides?
id. ib. 5, 6, 6:
quid vis tibi? Quid quaeris?
id. Heaut. 1, 1, 9: Ph. Fabulae! Ch. Quid vis tibi? id. Phorm. 5, 8, 53:
roganti ut se in Asiam praefectum duceret, Quid tibi vis, inquit, insane,
Cic. Or. 2, 67, 269; so in 2 d pers. plur.:
pro deum fidem, quid vobis vultis?
Liv. 3, 67, 7.—
(γ).
In 3 d pers.:
quid igitur sibi volt pater? cur simulat?
Ter. And. 2, 3, 1:
quid hic volt veterator sibi?
id. ib. 2, 6, 26:
proinde desinant aliquando me isdem inflare verbis: quid sibi iste vult?... Cur ornat eum a quo desertus est?
Cic. Dom. 11, 29:
quid sibi vellet (Caesar)? cur in suas possessiones veniret?
Caes. B. G. 1, 44 med.:
conicere in eum oculos, mirantes quid sibi vellet (i. e. by courting the plebeians),
Liv. 3, 35, 5:
qui quaererent quid sibi vellent qui armati Aventinum obsedissent,
id. 3, 50, 15:
quid sibi voluit providentia quae Aridaeum regno imposuit?
Sen. Ben. 4, 31, 1: volt, non volt dare Galla mihi, nec dicere possum quod volt et non volt, quid sibi Galla velit, Mart: 3, 90, 2.—
(δ).
Transf. of things as subjects, what means, what signifies? quid volt sibi, Syre, haec oratio? Ter. Heaut. 4, 1, 2:
ut pernoscatis quid sibi Eunuchus velit,
id. Eun. prol. 45:
quid ergo illae sibi statuae equestres inauratae volunt?
Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 61, § 150:
quid haec sibi horum civium Romanorum dona voluerunt?
id. ib. 2, 3, 80, §
186: avaritia senilis quid sibi velit, non intellego,
what is the meaning of the phrase, id. Sen. 18, 66:
quid ergo illa sibi vult pars altera orationis qua Romanos a me cultos ait?
Liv. 40, 12, 14:
tacitae quid vult sibi noctis imago?
Ov. M. 9, 473.—
5.
Bene or male alicui velle, to wish one well or ill, to like or dislike one (ante-class. and poet.): Ph. Bene volt tibi. St. Nequam est illud verbum bene volt, nisi qui bene facit, Plaut. Trin. 2, 4, 37 sq.:
jam diu ego huic bene et hic mihi volumus,
id. Ps. 1, 3, 4:
ut tibi, dum vivam, bene velim plus quam mihi,
id. Cas. 2, 8, 30:
egone illi ut non bene vellem?
id. Truc. 2, 4, 90; cf. id. ib. 2, 4, 95; id. Merc. 2, 1, 21; id. Ps. 4, 3, 7; id. Poen. 3, 3, 9:
nisi quod tibi bene ex animo volo,
Ter. Heaut. 5, 2, 6:
quo tibi male volt maleque faciet,
Plaut. Pers. 5, 2, 44:
atque isti etiam parum male volo,
id. Truc. 5, 7; cf. id. As. 5, 1, 13:
utinam sic sient qui mihi male volunt,
Ter. Eun. 4, 3, 13:
non sibi male vult,
he does not dislike himself, Petr. 38; so, melius or optime alicui velle, to like one better or best:
nec est quisquam mihi aeque melius quoi vellem,
Plaut. Capt. 3, 5, 42; id. Merc. 5, 2, 57:
illi ego ex omnibus optime volo,
id. Most. 1, 4, 24.—And bene velle = velle: bene volueris in precatione augurali Messalla augur ait, significare volueris, Fest. s. v. bene sponsis, p. 351.—
6.
With abl.: alicujus causa velle, to like one for his own sake, i. e. personally, a Ciceronian phrase, probably inst. of omnia alicujus causa velle; lit. to wish every thing (i.e. good) in somebody's behalf.
(α).
With omnia expressed: etsi mihi videor intellexisse cum tecum de re M. Annaeii locutus sum, te ipsius causa vehementer omnia velle, tamen, etc.... ut non dubitem quin magnus cumulus accedat commenda tionis meae, Cic. Fam. 13, 55, 1:
repente coepit dicere, se omnia Verris causa velle,
that he had the most friendly disposition towards Verres, id. Verr. 2, 2, 26, § 64:
accedit eo quod Varro magnopere ejus causa vult omnia,
id. Fam. 13, 22, 1.—
(β).
Without omnia:
per eos qui nostra causa volunt, valentque apud illum,
Cic. Att. 11, 8, 1:
sed et Phameae causa volebam,
id. ib. 13, 49, 1:
etsi te ipsius Attici causa velle intellexeram,
id. ib. 16, 16, A, 6:
valde enim ejus causa volo,
id. Fam. 16, 17, 2 fin.:
illud non perficis quo minus tua causa velim,
id. ib. 3, 7, 6;
12, 7, 1: si me velle tua causa putas,
id. ib. 7, 17, 2:
regis causa si qui sunt qui velint,
id. ib. 1, 1, 1:
credo tua causa velle Lentulum,
id. Q. Fr. 1, 4, 5; id. Div. in Caecil. 6, 21; cf. id. Imp. Pomp. (v. C. 1. b. supra), where the phrase has its literal meaning; cf. also: alicujus causa (omnia) cupere; v. cupio.—
7.
With acc. and subjunct. per ecthesin (ante-class.): nunc ego illum meum virum veniat velim (by mixture of constructions: meum virum velim; and:
meus vir veniat velim),
Plaut. Cas. 3, 2, 29:
nunc ego Simonidem mi obviam veniat velim,
id. Ps. 4, 5, 10:
nimis hercle ego illum corvum ad me veniat velim,
id. Aul. 4, 6, 4:
saltem aliquem velim qui mihi ex his locis viam monstret,
id. Rud. 1, 3, 35:
patrem atque matrem viverent vellem tibi,
id. Poen. 5, 2, 106; cf. id. Merc. 2, 1, 30 (v. E. 1. d. supra).
F.
Velle used absolutely, variously rendered to will, have a will, wish, consent, assent:
quod vos, malum... me sic ludificamini? Nolo volo, volo nolo rursum,
I nill I will, I will I nill again, Ter. Phorm. 5, 8, 57: novi ingenium mulierum: Nolunt ubi velis, ubi nolis cupiunt ultro, they will not where you will, etc., id. Eun. 4, 7, 43:
quis est cui velle non liceat?
who is not free to wish? Cic. Att. 7, 11. 2:
in magnis et voluisse sat est,
Prop. 2, 10 (3, 1), 6:
tarde velle nolentis est,
slow ness in consenting betrays the desire to refuse, Sen. Ben. 2, 5, 4:
quae (animalia) nullam injuriam nobis faciunt, quia velle non possunt, id. Ira, 2, 26, 4: ejus est nolle qui potest velle,
the power to assent implies the power to dissent, Dig. 50, 17, 3.—So velle substantively:
sed ego hoc ipsum velle miserius duco quam in crucem tolli,
that very wishing, Cic. Att. 7, 11, 2: inest enim velle in carendo, the word carere implies the notion of a wish, id. Tusc. 1, 36, 88:
velle ac posse in aequo positum erat,
his will and power were balanced, Val. Max. 6, 9, ext. 5:
velle tuum nolo, Didyme, nolle volo,
Mart. 5, 83, 2:
velle suum cuique est,
each has his own likings, Pers. 5, 53.
II.
In partic.
A.
Redundant, when the will to do is identified with the act itself.
1.
In imperative sentences.
a.
In independent sentences introduced by noli velle, where noli has lost the idea of volition:
nolite, judices, hunc velle maturius exstingui vulnere vestro quam suo fato,
do not resolve, Cic. Cael. 32, 79:
nolite igitur id velle quod fieri non potest,
id. Phil. 7, 8, 25: qui timor bonis omnibus injectus sit... nolite a me commoneri velle, do not wish, expect, to be reminded by me, etc., id. Mur. 25, 50: nolite hunc illi acerbum nuntium velle perferri, let it not be your decision that, etc., id. Balb. 28, 64: cujus auspicia pro vobis experti nolite adversus vos velle experiri, do not desire, etc., Liv. 7, 40, 16:
noli adversum eos me velle ducere, etc.,
Nep. Att. 4, 2.—
b.
Ne velis or ne velit fecisse = ne feceris, or ne facito (v. I. A. 3. a. supra).—So ne velis with pres. inf.:
neve, revertendi liber, abesse velis (= neve abfueris),
Ov. H. 1, 80.—
c.
In affirmative imperative sentences (velim esse = esto;
rare): tu tantum fida sorori Esse velis (= fida esto or sis),
Ov. M. 2, 745; and in 3 d pers.:
di procul a cunctis... Hujus notitiam gentis habere velint (= habeant),
id. P. 1, 7, 8:
credere modo qui discet velit (= credat qui discet),
Quint. 8, prooem. 12. —
d.
In clauses dependent on verbs of commanding and wishing:
aut quia significant divam praedicere ut armis Ac virtute velint patriam defendere terram (= ut defendant),
Lucr. 2, 641: precor quaesoque ne ante oculos patris facere et pati omnia infanda velis (= facias et patiaris). Liv. 23, 9, 2:
monentes ne experiri vellet imperium cujus vis, etc.,
id. 2, 59, 4; 39, 13, 2:
et mea... opto Vulnera qui fecit facta levare velit,
Ov. Tr. 5, 2, 18: nos contra (oravimus) [p. 2009]... ne vertere secum Cuncta pater fatoque urguenti incumbere vellet, Verg. A. 2, 653. —With pass. perf. inf. (v. I. B. 9. b. b):
legati Sullam orant ut filii innocentis fortunas conservatas velit (virtually = fortunas conservet),
Cic. Rosc. Am. 9, 25:
a te peto ut utilitatem sociorum per te quam maxime defensam et auctam velis (= defendas et augeas),
id. Fam. 13, 9, 3.—So after utinam or ut:
utinam illi qui prius eum viderint me apud eum velint adjutum tantum quantum ego vellem si quid possem (= utinam illi me adjuvent quantum ego adjuvarem, etc.),
id. Att. 11, 7, 7:
cautius ut saevo velles te credere Marti (= utinam te credidisses),
Verg. A. 11, 153:
edictum praemittit ad quam diem magistratus... sibi esse praesto Cordubae vellet (= sibi praesto essent),
Caes. B. C. 1, 19 (cf. also I. B. 9. b. b, and I. B. 2. fin. supra).—
2.
In conditional clauses, si facere velim = si faciam, often rendered by the potential or future auxiliaries would or will:
non tu scis, Bacchae bacchanti si velis advorsarier, ex insana insaniorem facies? (= si advorseris),
Plaut. Am. 2, 2, 80:
si meum Imperium exsequi voluisset, interemptam oportuit (= si executus esset),
Ter. Heaut. 4, 1, 22:
si id confiteri velim, tamen istum condemnetis necesse est (= si id confitear),
if I would acknowledge, Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 18, § 45:
si quis velit ita dicere... nihil dicat (= si quis dicat),
id. Fat. 14, 32:
dies deficiat si velim numerare, etc.,
id. N. D. 3, 32, 81;
so,
id. Tusc. 5, 35, 102; id. Verr. 2, 2, 21, § 52:
qua in sententia si constare voluissent, suam auctoritatem... recuperassent,
id. Fam. 1, 9, 14; id. Verr. 2, 1, 11, § 31; id. Lael. 20, 75:
conicere potestis, si recordari volueritis quanta, etc.,
if you will remember, id. Verr. 2, 4, 58, § 129; so id. Or. 1, 44, 197; id. Brut. 1, 2, 5:
quod si audire voletis externa, maximas res publicas ab adulescentibus labefactatas reperietis,
id. Sen. 6, 20; so id. Or. 1, 60, 256; 2, 23, 95:
ejus me compotem voti vos facere potestis, si meminisse vultis, non vos in Samnio, etc.,
Liv. 7, 40, 5; 23, 13, 6; 23, 15, 4: cum olera Diogeni lavanti Aristippus dixisset: si Dionysium adulare velles, ista non esses;
Imo, inquit, si tu ista esse velles, non adulares Dionysium,
Val. Max. 4, 3, ext. 4:
ut si his (legibus) perpetuo uti voluissent, sempiternum habituri fuerint imperium,
id. 5, 3, ext. 3:
quid enim si mirari velit, non in silvestribus dumis poma pendere,
Sen. Ira, 2, 10, 6; cf. Curt. 5, 1, 1; 3, 5, 6; Ov. H. 17 (18), 43.—With perf. inf. pass.:
nisi ea (opera) certi auctores monumentis suis testata esse voluissent,
Val. Max. 3, 2, 24.—
3.
In declarative sentences.
a.
Volo in 1 st pers. with perf. pass. inf. or part. (volo oratum esse or oratum = oro; v. I. B. 9. b. a and b):
vos omnes opere magno esse oratos volo benigne ut operam detis, etc.,
Plaut. Cas. prol. 21:
justam rem et facilem esse oratam a vobis volo,
id. Am. prol. 33:
illud tamen te esse admonitum volo, etc.,
Cic. Cael. 3, 8:
sed etiam est paucis vos quod monitos voluerim,
Plaut. Capt. prol. 53:
illud te, Tulli, monitum velim etc.,
Liv. 1, 23, 8:
quamobrem omnes eos oratos volo Ne, etc.,
Ter. Heaut. prol. 26; so, factum volo = faciam: serva tibi sodalem, et mihi filium. Mne. Factum volo, I will, Plaut. Bacch. 3, 3, 91: pariter nunc opera me adjuves ac, etc. Nau. Factum volo, Ter. Phorm. 5, 3, 4; so Plaut. Pers. 2, 5, 10.—In 3 d pers.:
esse salutatum vult te mea littera primum,
Ov. P. 2, 7, 1.—
b.
With pres. inf.:
propterea te vocari ad cenam volo (= voco te),
Plaut. Capt. 1, 2, 72:
sed nunc rogare hoc ego vicissim te volo: quid fuit, etc. (= nunc te rogo),
id. Trin. 1, 2, 136.—
c.
With perf. act. inf.:
pace tua dixisse velim (= pace tua dixerim),
Ov. P. 3, 1, 9.—
d.
In other connections, when the will or purpose is made more prominent than the action:
eorum alter, qui Antiochus vocatur, iter per Siciliam facere voluit (= fecit),
Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 27, § 61:
si suscipere eam (religionem) nolletis, tamen in eo qui violasset sancire vos velle oporteret (= sancire vos oporteret),
id. ib. 2, 4, 51, §
114: ut insequentibus diebus nemo eorum forum aut publicum adspicere vellet (= adspiceret),
Liv. 9, 7, 11:
talentis mille percussorem in me emere voluisti (= emisti),
Curt. 3, 5, 6: quin etiam senatus gratias ei agentem quod redire voluisset ante portas eduxit (= quod redisset), Val. Max. 3, 4, 4:
utri prius gratulemur, qui hoc dicere voluit, an cui audire contigit? (= qui hoc dixit),
id. 4, 7, ext. 2:
sic tua non paucae carpere facta volent (= carpent),
Ov. P. 3, 1, 64.
B.
Velim, as potential subjunctive (mostly in 1 st pers. sing., as subjunctive of modest statement), = volo, I wish, I should like.
1.
With verb in the second person.
a.
With pres. subj., so most frequently in Cic.
(α).
As a modest imperative of the dependent verb: velim facias = fac, I wish you would do it, please do it:
ego quae in rem tuam sint, ea velim facias,
Ter. Phorm. 2, 4, 9:
eas (litteras) in eundem fasciculum velim addas,
Cic. Att. 12, 53:
eum salvere jubeas velim,
id. ib. 7, 7, 7:
velim me facias certiorem, etc.,
id. ib. 1, 19, 9:
tu velim saepe ad nos scribas,
id. ib. 1, 12, 4:
velim mihi ignoscas,
id. Fam. 13, 75, 1:
tu velim animum a me parumper avertas,
id. Lael. 1, 5; cf. id. Att. 1, 11, 3; 7, 3, 11; 8, 12, 5; id. Fam. 15, 3, 2 et saep.:
haec pro causa mea dicta accipiatis velim,
Liv. 42, 34, 13: velim, inquit, hoc mihi probes, Aug. ap. Suet. Aug. 51:
Musa velim memores, etc.,
Hor. S. 1, 5, 53.—
(β).
Expressing a wish without a command (v. vellem):
vera dicas velim,
I wish you told the truth, Plaut. Cas. 2, 3, 18:
quam velim Bruto persuadeas ut Asturae sit,
Cic. Att. 14, 15, 4:
ipse velim poenas experiare meas,
Ov. Tr. 3, 11, 74;
so in asseverations: ita velim me promerentem ames, dum vivas, mi pater, ut... id mihi vehementer dolet,
Ter. Ad. 4, 5, 47.—
b.
With infinitive clause.
(α).
With the force of a modest imperative:
sed qui istuc credam ita esse, mihi dici velim (i. e. a te),
Ter. Phorm. 5, 6, 15:
extremum illud est quod mihi abs te responderi velim,
Cic. Vat. 17, 41 (may be a dependent subjunctive):
itaque vos ego, milites, non eo solum animo.... pugnare velim, etc.,
Liv. 21, 41, 10.—
(β).
As a mere wish:
velim te arbitrari, frater, etc.,
Plaut. Aul. 2, 1, 1:
primum te arbitrari id quod res est velim,
Ter. Eun. 5, 5, 9.—With perf. act.:
hanc te quoque ad ceteras tuas eximias virtutes, Masinissa, adjecisse velim,
Liv. 30, 14, 6.—With perf. pass., Liv. 1, 23, 8 (v. II. A. 3. a. supra).—
c.
With ut (rare):
de tuis velim ut eo sis animo, quo debes esse,
Cic. Fam. 4, 14, 4. —
d.
With ne (rare), Plaut. Rud. 4, 4, 23 (v. I. C. 2. supra).—
2.
With dependent verb in the third person, expressing a wish.
a.
With pres. subj.:
ita se defatigent velim Ut, etc.,
Ter. Ad. 4, 1, 3:
de Cicerone quae mihi scribis, jucunda mihi sunt: velim sint prospera,
Cic. Att. 14, 11, 2:
velim seu Himilco, seu Mago respondeat,
Liv. 23, 12, 15:
sint haec vera velim,
Verg. Cir. 306:
nulla me velim syllaba effugiat,
Quint. 11, 2, 45.—With final clause:
tu velim mihi ad urbem praesto sis, ut tuis consiliis utar,
Cic. Att. 9, 16, 3; cf. id. ib. 11, 11, 2 (v. I. C. 2. supra).—With ellips. of pres. subj.:
velim mehercule Asturae Brutus (i. e. sit),
Cic. Att. 14, 11, 1.—
b.
With perf. subj. (a wish referring to the past):
nimis velim improbissumo homini malas edentaverint,
Plaut. Rud. 3, 2, 48.—
c.
With inf.-clause:
ne ego nunc mihi modium mille esse argenti velim!
Plaut. Stich. 4, 2, 9: di me perdant! Me. Quodcunque optes, velim tibi contingere, id. Cist. 2, 1, 30:
velim eum tibi placere quam maxime,
Cic. Brut. 71, 249: idque primum ita esse velim;
deinde etiam, si non sit, mihi persuaderi tamen velim,
id. Tusc. 1, 11, 24:
quod faxitis, deos velim fortunare,
Liv. 6, 41, 12.—With perf. pass. inf. (v. I. B. 9. b. b, supra):
edepol te hodie lapide percussum velim,
Plaut. Stich. 4, 2, 33:
moribus praefectum mulierum hunc factum velim,
id. Aul. 3, 5, 30.—With inf.-clause understood:
nimium plus quam velim nostrorum ingenia sunt mobilia,
Liv. 2, 37, 4.—
3.
With verb in the first person.
a.
With inf. pres. (so most freq.):
atque hoc velim probare omnibus, etc.,
Cic. Prov. Cons. 20, 47:
velim scire ecquid de te recordere,
id. Tusc. 1, 6, 13:
quare te, ut polliceris, videre plane velim,
id. Att. 11, 9, 3:
nec vero velim... a calce ad carceres revocari,
id. Sen. 23, 83:
sed multitudo ea quid animorum... habeat scire velim,
Liv. 23, 12, 7:
interrogare tamen velim, an Isocrates Attice dixerit,
Quint. 12, 10, 22.—With perf. inf. act., Ov. P. 3, 1, 9 (v. II. A. 3. c.).—
b.
With acc. and inf.:
quod velis, modo id velim me scire,
Plaut. Cas. 2, 4, 8.—So with perf. pass. inf.:
ego praeterquam quod nihil haustum ex vano velim, Fabium... potissimum auctorem habui,
Liv. 22, 7, 4.—
c.
With subj. pres.:
eo velim tam facili uti possim et tam bono in me quam Curione,
Cic. Att. 10, 8, 10 B. and K. ex conj. Mull. (Lachm., Hoffm. posse; al. possem).—
4.
Velim in the principal sentence of conditional clauses, I would, I should be willing:
aetatem velim servire, Libanum ut (= si) conveniam modo,
Plaut. As. 2, 2, 8:
velim, si fieri possit,
id. Truc. 2, 4, 12:
si quid tibi compendi facere possim, factum edepol velim (redundant),
id. ib. 2, 4, 26:
si possim, velim,
id. Stich. 4, 2, 9:
nec velim (imitari orationes Thucydidis) si possim,
Cic. Brut. 83, 287:
si liceat, nulli cognitus esse velim,
Ov. Tr. 5, 12, 42.—
5.
The other persons of velim in potential use (rare).
a.
Velis.
(α).
Imperatively = cupito:
quoniam non potest fieri quod vis, Id velis quod possit,
Ter. And. 2, 1, 6:
atque aliquos tamen esse velis tibi, alumna, penates,
Verg. Cir. 331.—
(β).
Declaratively with indef. subj.: quom inopia'st, cupias; quando ejus copia'st, tum non velis, then you (i.e. people, they) do not want it, Plaut. Trin. 3, 2, 45.—
(γ).
Redundant, as a form of the imperative of the dependent verb, Ov. Am. 1, 4, 38 (v. I. A. 3. a. b); id. H. 1, 80 (v. II. A. 1. b.); id. M. 2, 746 (v. II. A. 1. c.).—
b.
Velit.
(α).
Modestly for vult:
te super aetherias licentius auras Haud pater ille velit, etc.,
Verg. A. 7, 558: nemo enim minui velit id in quo maximus fuit, would like that to be diminished in which, etc., Quint. 12, 11, 6; cf. Verg. A. 2, 104, and Ov. H. 9, 7 (v. I. E. 1. c. supra).— So, poet., instead of vellet with perf. inf.:
ut fiat, quid non illa dedisse velit?
Ov. Am. 2, 17, 30.—
(β).
= imperative of third person:
arma velit, poscatque simul rapiatque juventus,
Verg. A. 7, 340.—Redundantly, giving to the dependent verb the force of an imperative, Quint. 8, prooem. 12 (v. II. A. 1. c. supra; v. also I. A. 3. a. supra).—
c.
Velimus.
(α).
In the optative sense of velim:
sed scire velimus quod tibi nomen siet,
Plaut. Pers. 4, 6, 18.—
(β).
With imperative sense (= let us, we should, etc.), Quint. 6, 3, 28 (v. I. A. 2. d. supra).—
d.
Velitis = velim velitis (i. e. jubeatis, jubete):
novos consules ita cum Samnite gerere bellum velitis ut omnia ante nos bella gesta sunt,
Liv. 9, 8, 10.—So especially in velitis jubeatis, a formula in submitting a law to the votes of the people in the comitia centuriata or tributa, let it be resolved and ordered by you:
rogatus in haec verba populus: velitis jubeatisne haec sic fieri, si respublica populi Romani Quiritium, etc.,
Liv. 22, 10, 2:
velitis jubeatis, Quirites... uti de ea re Ser. Sulpicius praetor urbanus ad senatum referat, etc.,
id. 38, 54, 3.—And parodied by Cic.:
velitis jubeatis ut quod Cicero versum fecerit,
Cic. Pis. 29, 72.—So in oblique discourse, vellent juberent:
rogationem promulgavit, vellent juberent Philippo... bellum indici,
Liv. 31, 6, 1:
vellent juberentne se regnare,
id. 1, 46, 1; cf.
in the resolution of the people: plebis sic jussit: quod senatus... censeat, id volumus jubemusque,
id. 26, 33, 14.—
e.
Velint, optative and redundant, Cic. Att. 11, 7, 7 (v. II. A. 1. d.); Ov. P. 1, 7, 8 (v. II. A. 1. c.).
C.
Vellem, as potential subjunctive, I wish, should like, should have liked, representing the wish as contrary to fact, while velim refers to a wish which may be realized:
de Menedemo vellem verum fuisset, de regina velim verum sit,
Cic. Att. 15, 4, 4. It is not used with imperative force; cf.:
quod scribis, putare te... vellem scriberes, cur ita putares... tu tamen velim scribas,
Cic. Att. 11, 24, 5.—Often quam vellem, how I wish, i. e. I wish very much; and in the same sense: nimium vellem, v. infra.
1.
With verb in first person.
a.
With inf. pres., I wish, would like, referring to present or future actions:
videre equidem vos vellem, cum huic aurum darem,
Plaut. Poen. 3, 3, 68:
vellem equidem idem posse gloriari quod Cyrus,
Cic. Sen. 10, 32:
vellem equidem vobis placere, Quirites, sed, etc.,
Liv. 3, 68, 9:
quam fieri vellem meus libellus!
Mart. 8, 72, 9.—With cuperem and optarem:
nunc ego Triptolemi cuperem conscendere currus... Nunc ego Medeae vellem frenare dracones... Nunc ego jactandas optarem sumere pennas, etc.,
Ov. Tr. 3, 8, 1 sqq.— [p. 2010] Rarely, I should have liked:
tum equidem istuc os tuum inpudens videre nimium vellem!
Ter. Eun. 3, 5, 49.—And in conditional sense:
maerorem minui: dolorem nec potui, nec, si possem, vellem (i. e. minuere),
Cic. Att. 12, 28, 2:
certe ego, si sineres, titulum tibi reddere vellem,
Ov. Tr. 4, 5, 13:
sic nec amari quidem vellem (i. e. if I were in his place),
Sen. Ira, 1, 20, 4.—
b.
With perf. inf., I wish I had:
abiit, vah! Rogasse vellem,
I wish I had asked him, Ter. Heaut. 5, 2, 25:
maxime vellem semper tecum fuisse,
Cic. Att. 8, 11, D, 5:
quam vellem petisse ab eo quod audio Philippum impetrasse,
id. ib. 10, 4, 10:
non equidem vellem, quoniam nocitura fuerunt, Pieridum sacris imposuisse manum,
Ov. Tr. 4, 1, 27:
ante equidem summa de re statuisse, Latini, Et vellem, et fuerat melius,
Verg. A. 11, 303. —
c.
With inf.-clause, the predicate being a perf. part. (v. I. B. 9. b. b, supra):
virum me natam vellem,
would I had been born a man! Ter. Phorm. 5, 3, 9.—
d.
With subj. imperf. (rare):
quam vellem, Panaetium nostrum nobiscum haberemus,
Cic. Rep. 1, 10, 15.—
2.
The subject of the dependent verb in the second person.
a.
With subj. imperf. (the regular construction):
hodie igitur me videbit, ac vellem tum tu adesses,
I wish you could be present, Cic. Att. 13, 7, 2:
quam vellem de his etiam oratoribus tibi dicere luberet,
I wish you would please, id. Brut. 71, 248.—
b.
With subj. pluperf., I wish you had:
vellem Idibus Martiis me ad cenam invitasses,
Cic. Fam. 12, 4, 1:
quam vellem te ad Stoicos inclinavisses,
id. Fin. 3, 3, 10:
vellem suscepisses juvenem regendum,
id. Att. 10, 6, 2:
quam vellem Bruto studium tuum navare potuisses,
id. ib. 15, 4, 5.—
c.
With ne and pluperf. subj.:
tu vellem ne veritus esses ne parum libenter legerem tuas litteras,
Cic. Fam. 7, 33, 2.—
d.
With ellipsis of verb: vera cantas, vana vellem (i. e. cantares). Plaut. Most. 3, 4, 41.—
3.
With verb in third person.
a.
With imperf. subj. (the regular construction):
patrem atque matrem viverent vellem tibi (per ecthesin, v. I. E. b.),
Plaut. Poen. 5, 2, 106:
vellem adesset Antonius, modo sine advocatis,
Cic. Phil. 1, 7, 16:
vellem nobis hoc idem vere dicere liceret,
id. Off. 3, 1, 1:
vellem adesse posset Panaetius,
id. Tusc. 1, 33, 81:
vellem hoc esset laborare,
id. Or. 2, 71, 287.—
b.
With pluperf. subj.:
vellem aliqui ex vobis robustioribus hunc male dicendi locum suscepissent,
Cic. Cael. 3, 7:
vellem dictum esset ab eodem etiam de Dione,
id. ib. 10, 23; so id. ib. 31, 74; id. Brut. 44, 163:
quam vellem Dareus aliquid ex hac indole hausisset!
Curt. 3, 32 (12), 26.—
c.
With inf.-clause.
(α).
With inf. pres., I wish he were:
quam non abesse ab hujus judicio L. Vulsionem vellem!
Cic. Clu. 70, 198:
nunc mihi... Vellem, Maeonide, pectus inesse tuum,
Ov. F. 2, 120.—
(β).
With perf. inf. or part., I wish he had, had been:
quam vellem Menedemum invitatum!
Ter. Heaut. 1, 2, 11:
epistulas, quas quidem vellem mihi numquam redditas,
Cic. Att. 11, 22, 1.—
With ellipsis of predicate: illud quoque vellem antea (i. e. factum, or factum esse),
Cic. Att. 11, 23, 3.—
d.
With ut, Cic. Sull. 1, 1; id. Fam. 7, 33, 2 (v. I. C. 1. a. supra).—
4.
With acc. of a neuter pronoun or of a noun:
aliquando sentiam us nihil nobis nisi, id quod minime vellem, spiritum reliquum esse,
Cic. Att. 9, 19, 2: tris eos libros maxime nunc vellem: apti essent ad id quod cogito, I would like to have (cf. I. E. 1. a.), id. ib. 13, 22, 2.—
5.
In the other persons of vellem (mostly poet.).
a.
Velles.
(α).
In optative sentences redundant, Verg. A. 11, 153 (v. II. A. 1. d.).—
(β).
Of an indefinite subject:
velles eum (Senecam) suo ingenio dixisse, alieno judicio,
Quint. 10, 1, 130.—
b.
Vellet.
(α).
In the potential sense of vellem: vellet abesse quidem;
sed adest. Velletque videre, Non etiam sentire canum fera facta suorum,
Ov. M. 3, 247.—
(β).
Conditionally:
quis vellet tanti nuntius esse mali (i. e. if in this situation)?
Ov. H. 12, 146.—
c.
Vellent.
(α).
In the potential sense of vellem:
quam vellent aethere in alto Nunc of pauperiem et duros perferre labores!
Verg. A. 6, 436.—
(β).
Conditionally: nec superi vellent hoc licuisse sibi, would wish, i. e. if in this situation, Mart. 4, 44, 8.
D.
Volam and voluero.
1.
In gen.: respiciendus erit sermo stipulationis, utrumne talis sit: quem voluero, an quem volam. Nam si talis fuerit quem voluero, cum semel elegerit, mutare voluntatem non poterit;
si vero... quem volam, donec judicium dictet, mutandi potestatem habebit,
Dig. 45, 1, 112.—
2.
Volam in principal sentences.
(α).
= Engl. future, I shall wish, etc.:
et commeminisse hoc ego volam te,
I shall require you to recollect this, Plaut. Curc. 4, 2, 7: cum omnia habueris, tunc habere et sapientiam voles? will you also wish to have wisdom when? etc., Sen. Ep. 17, 8.—
(β).
Denoting present probability: et scilicet jam me hoc voles patrem exorare, ut, etc., you doubtless wish me, etc., Ter. Heaut. 4, 3, 27.—
3.
In clauses dependent on predicates implying a future, generally rendered by an English present:
quid si sors aliter quam voles evenerit?
otherwise than as you wish, Plaut. Cas. 2, 5, 35:
tum te, si voles, cum patriae quod debes solveris, satis diu vixisse dicito,
then if you choose, if you will, Cic. Marcell. 9, 27:
decedes cum voles,
id. Att. 6, 3, 2:
qui magis effugies eos qui volent fingere?
those who are bent upon inventing, who will invent, falsehoods, id. ib. 8, 2, 2; cf. id. ib. 1, 1, 4; id. Verr. 2, 4, 25, § 55; id. Prov. Cons. 9, 24:
quod voles gratum esse, rarum effice,
Sen. Ben. 1, 14, 1; cf. id. Brev. Vit. 7, 9: si di volent, the gods permitting, August. ap. Suet. Calig. 8:
invenies, vere si reperire voles,
Ov. P. 3, 1, 34; cf. Hor. Ep. 1, 16, 78; Tib. 1, 4, 45.—So, voluero:
quem (locum) si qui vitare voluerit, sex milium circuitu in oppidum pervenit,
who wishes to avoid this spot, Caes. B. C. 2, 24.
E.
Si vis, parenthetically.
1.
If you please (cf. sis, supra init.):
paulum opperirier, Si vis,
Ter. Eun. 5, 2, 52:
audi, si vis, nunc jam,
id. Ad. 2, 1, 30:
dic, si vis, de quo disputari velis,
Cic. Tusc. 2, 5, 13.—
2.
If you wish, choose, insist upon it:
hanc quoque jucunditatem, si vis, transfer in animum,
Cic. Fin. 2, 4, 14:
addam, si vis, animi, etc.,
id. ib. 2, 27, 89:
concedam hoc ipsum, si vis, etc.,
id. Div. 2, 15, 34.
F.
Quam, with any person of the pres. indic. or subj., or imperf. subj. or future, = quamvis, in a concessive sense, virtually, however, however much.
1.
3 d pers. sing.:
quod illa, quam velit sit potens, numquam impetravisset (= quamvis sit potens),
however powerful she may be, Cic. Cael. 26, 63:
C. Gracchus dixit, sibi in somnis Ti. fratrem visum esse dicere, quam vellet cunctaretur, tamen eodem sibi leto... esse pereundum,
id. Div. 1, 26, 56:
quam volet jocetur,
id. N. D. 2, 17, 46.—
2.
1 st pers. plur.:
quam volumus licet ipsi nos amemus, tamen, etc.,
Cic. Har. Resp. 9, 19.—
3.
2 d pers. plur.: exspectate facinus quam vultis improbum, vincam tamen, etc., expect a crime, however wicked ( ever so wicked), etc., Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 5, § 11;
but: hac actione quam voletis multi dicent,
as many as you choose, id. ib. 2, 2, 42, § 102.—
4.
3 d pers. plur.:
quam volent illi cedant, tamen a re publica revocabuntur,
Cic. Phil. 2, 44, 113:
quam volent in conviviis faceti, dicaces, etc., sint, alia fori vis est, alia triclinii,
id. Cael. 28, 67;
but: et ceteri quam volent magnas pecunias capere possint,
as much money as they choose, id. Verr. 2, 2, 58, § 142.
G.
Volo = malo, to prefer, with a comparative clause (rare):
quodsi in ceteris quoque studiis a multis eligere homines commodissimum quodque, quam sese uni alicui certo vellent addicere, = si se eligere mallent quam se uni addicere,
Cic. Inv. 2, 2, 5:
malae rei quam nullius duces esse volunt,
Liv. 3, 68, 11:
famaene credi velis quanta urbs a te capta sit, quam posteris quoque eam spectando esse?
id. 25, 29, 6.
H.
With magis and maxime.
1.
Magis velle: ut tu illam salvam magis velles quam ego, you wish more than I, etc., Ter. Hec. 2, 2, 17.—
2.
With maxime, to wish above all, more than any thing or any one else, to be most agreeable to one, to like best, to prefer (among more than two alternatives):
quia id maxime volo ut illi istoc confugiant,
wish above all, Plaut. Most. 5, 1, 49; so id. Trin. 3, 2, 38:
maxime vellem, judices, ut P. Sulla, etc.,
Cic. Sull. 1, 1:
caritate nos capiunt reges, consilio optimates, libertate populi, ut in comparando difficile ad eligendum sit, quid maxime velis,
which you prefer, like best, id. Rep. 1, 35, 55; so, quemadmodum ego maxime vellem, id. Att. 13, 1, 1:
tris eos libros maxime nunc vellem,
above all others, id. ib. 13, 32, 2:
alia excusanti juveni, alia recipienti futura, ita ut maxime vellet senatus responderi placuit,
as it was most agreeable to him, Liv. 39, 47:
si di tibi permisissent quo modo maxime velles experiri animum meum,
in the manner most convenient to yourself, Curt. 3, 6, 12.
K.
In disjunctive co - ordination.
1.
With sive... sive:
tu nunc, sive ego volo, seu nolo, sola me ut vivam facis,
whether I choose or not, Plaut. Cist. 3, 14:
itaque Campanos sive velint, sive nolint, quieturos,
Liv. 8, 2, 13.—
2.
Without connectives.
a.
Vis tu... vis:
congredi cum hoste liceat... vis tu mari, vis terra, vis acie, vis urbibus expugnandis experiri virtutem?
Liv. 25, 6, 22.—
b.
Velim nolim.
(α).
Interrogatively, = utrum velim nec ne:
velit nolit scire, difficile est,
it is difficult to know whether he intends it or not, Cic. Q. Fr. 3, 8, 4.—
(β).
= seu velim seu nolim:
ut mihi, velim nolim, sit certa quaedam tuenda sententia,
whether I will or not, Cic. N. D. 1, 7, 17:
velim nolim, in cognomine Scipionum haeream necesse est,
Val. Max. 3, 7, 3:
mors interim adest, cui velis nolis vacandum est,
Sen. Brev. Vit. 8, 5:
hunc ita fundatum necesse est, velit nolit, sequatur hilaritas continua,
id. Vit. Beat. 4, 4:
velint nolint, respondendum est... beate vivere bonum non esse,
id. Ep. 117, 4:
praeterea futuri principes, velint nolint, sciant, etc.,
Plin. Pan. 20 fin. Part. and P. a.: vŏlens, entis.
A.
As a part. proper, retaining the meaning and construction of velle, with the force of a relative or adverbial clause.
1.
Agreeing with some member of the sentence ( poet. and in post-class. prose;
rare): neque illum... multa volentem Dicere praeterea vidit (= qui multa voluit dicere),
Verg. G. 4, 501; id. A. 2, 790:
nec me vis ulla volentem Avertet (i. e. si adhaerere foederi volo),
id. ib. 12, 203: decemviri, minuere volentes hujuscemodi violentiam... putaverunt, etc., intending ( who intended) to diminish such a violence, etc., Gell. 20, 1, 34:
Milo, experiri etiamtunc volens, an ullae sibi reliquae vires adessent... rescindere quercum conatus est,
id. 15, 16, 3:
scio quosdam testatores, efficere volentes ne servi sui umquam ad libertatem venirent, etc., hactenus scribere solitos,
Dig. 40, 4, 61:
si te volentem ad prohibendum venire, deterruerit aliquis, etc.,
ib. 43, 24, 1, § 10.—
2.
Abl. absol. (not ante-Aug.):
ne cujus militis scripti nomen nisi ipso volente deleretur,
except with his consent, Liv. 7, 41, 4; so,
Teum ex medio cursu classem repente avertit, aut volentibus iis usurus commeatu parato hostibus, aut ipsos pro hostibus habiturus,
with their consent, id. 37, 27, 3:
ponuntque ferocia Poeni Corda, volente deo,
since the god willed it, Verg. A. 1, 303: Thrasippo supplicium a se voluntaria morte exigere volente, while he was about to inflict punishment on himself, etc., Val. Max. 5, 1, ext. 2: scire volentibus immortalibus dis an Romana virtus imperium orbis mereretur, it being the will of the gods to know, etc., Flor. 1, 13, 3 (1, 7, 3): qui sciente aut volente eo ad quem res pertinet, possessionem nanciscitur, with the knowledge and consent of the person who, etc., Dig. 41, 2, 6. —
B.
As adj., willing, voluntary, and hence, favorably disposed (opp. invitus).
1.
Attributively.
a.
In the phrase cum dis volentibus, lit. with the willing or favoring gods, i. e. with the will, permission, or favor of the gods: dono ducite doque volentibu' cum magnis dis, Enn. ap. Cic. Off. 1, 12, 38 (Ann. v. 208 Vahl.):
sequere hac, mea gnata, me cum dis volentibus,
Plaut. Pers. 3, 1, 4:
cum dis volentibus quodque bene eveniat mando tibi Mani uti illaec suovetaurilia, etc.,
Cato, R. R. 141 (142).— And without cum, abl. absol.:
virtute ac dis volentibus magni estis et opulenti,
Sall. J. 14, 19.—
b.
Volenti animo.
(α).
= cupide, eagerly:
Romae plebes litteris quae de Metello ac Mario missae erant, volenti animo de ambobus acceperant,
Sall. J. 73, 3. —
(β).
On purpose, intentionally:
consilio hanc omnes animisque volentibus urbem Adferimur,
Verg. A. 7, 216.—
2.
Predicatively.
a.
Agreeing with the subject-nom. or subject - acc.
(α).
Voluntarily, willingly, [p. 2011] gladly (class.):
(hi) divini generis appellentur... vobisque jure et lege volentes pareant,
Cic. Univ. 11 fin.:
quas victi ab hostibus poenas metuerant, eas ipsi volentes pendere,
Sall. J. 76, 6:
quia volentes in amicitiam non veniebant,
Liv. 21, 39, 4:
si volentes ac non coacti mansissent in amicitia,
id. 24, 37, 7:
quocunque loco seu volens seu invitus constitisti,
id. 7, 40, 13:
itaque se numquam volentem parte qua posset rerum consilio gerendarum cessurum,
id. 22, 27, 9:
(virtus), quidquid evenerit, feret, non patiens tantum, sed etiam volens,
Sen. Vit. Beat. 15, 5:
non est referre gratiam quod volens acceperis nolenti reddere,
id. Ben. 4, 40, 4:
volens vos Turnus adoro,
Verg. A. 10, 677; 3, 457; 6, 146;
12, 833: date vina volentes,
id. ib. 8, 275: ipsa autem macie tenuant armenta volentes ( on purpose), id. G. 3, 129.—And referring to subjects denoting things: quos rami fructus, quos ipsa volentia rura Sponte tulere sua, carpsit ( spontaneously and willingly), Verg. G. 2, 500.—
(β).
Favorably; with propitius, favorably and kindly, referring to the gods:
precantes Jovem ut volens propitius praebeat sacra arma pro patria,
Liv. 24, 21, 10:
precantibus ut volens propitiaque urbem Romanam iniret,
id. 29, 14, 13:
in ea arce (Victoriam) sacratam, volentem propitiamque, firmam ac stabilem fore populo Romano,
id. 22, 37, 12; 1, 16, 3; 7, 26, 3; 24, 38, 8; Inscr. Orell. 2489 sq.—Parodied by Plautus:
agite, bibite, festivae fores! fite mihi volentes propitiae,
Plaut. Curc. 1, 1, 89.— Abl. absol.:
omnia diis propitiis volentibusque ea faciemus,
with the favor and help of the gods, Liv. 39, 16, 11 Weissenb. ad loc.:
si (Jovem) invocem ut dexter ac volens assit,
Quint. 4, prooem. 5.—
b.
Agreeing with other terms of the sentence (rare): volenti consuli causa in Pamphyliam devertendi oblata est, a welcome cause was offered to the consul, etc., Liv. 38, 15, 3:
quod nobis volentibus facile continget,
if we wish, Quint. 6, 2, 30:
is Ariobarzanem volentibus Armeniis praefecit,
to their satisfaction, Tac. A. 2, 4:
gemis... hominem, Urse, tuum, cui dulce volenti servitium... erat,
to whom his servitude was sweet, since he liked it, Stat. S. 2, 6, 15:
me mea virtus, etc., fatis egere volentem,
Verg. A. 8, 133:
saepe ille volentem castigabat erum,
administered kindly received rebukes, Stat. S. 2, 6, 50.—
c.
In the phrase aliquid mihi volenti est or putatur, etc., something is welcome, acceptable to me, pleases me (= volens habeo or accipio aliquid; cf. the Gr. Humin tauta boulomenois estin, and, mihi aliquid cupienti est; v. cupio;
rare but class.): uti militibus exaequatus cum imperatore labos volentibus esset,
that the equalization of labor was acceptable to the soldier, Sall. J. 100, 4:
quia neque plebei militia volenti putabatur,
id. ib. 84, 3 Dietsch:
grande periculum maritumis civitatibus esse, et quibusdam volentibus novas res fore,
that to some a change of the government would be welcome, Liv. 21, 50, 10:
quibus bellum volentibus erat, probare exemplum,
Tac. Agr. 18.— Impers. with subject - inf.: ceterisque remanere et in verba Vespasiani adigi volentibus fuit, to the rest it was acceptable to remain, etc., Tac. H. 3, 43.—With subject-inf. understood:
si volentibus vobis erit, in medium profero quae... legisse memini,
Macr. S. 7, 13, 11:
si volentibus vobis erit, diem fabulis et epulis exigamus,
id. ib. 1, 7; 2, 3 fin.; 6, 6 init. —
3.
As subst. (mostly post-Aug.).
a.
vŏlens, entis, m., = is qui vult, in the different meanings, and often with the construction of the verb.
(α).
One who wishes:
nunc cis Hiberum castra Romana esse, arcem tutam perfugiumque novas volentibus res,
Liv. 22, 22, 11:
consulere se volentibus vacuas aures accommodavit,
Val. Max. 5, 8, 3:
quid opus libertate si volentibus luxu perire non licet,
id. 2, 9, 5:
discere meliora volentibus promptum est,
i. e. it depends on our own will to learn better things, Quint. 11, 11, 12:
nec sum in hoc sollicitus, dum res ipsa volentibus discere appareat,
to the students, id. 8, 4, 15:
mori volentibus vis adhibita vivendi,
Suet. Tib. 61.—
(β).
One who intends, is about:
juris ignorantia non prodest acquirere volentibus,
i. e. in the acquisition of property, Dig. 22, 6, 7:
si quis volentem incipere uti frui prohibuit,
one who is about to enter upon a usufruct, ib. 43, 16, 3, § 14. —
(γ).
One who is willing:
non refert quid sit quod datur, nisi a volente volenti datur,
unless it is both willingly given and received, Sen. Ben. 2, 18, 8:
ducunt volentem fata, nolentem trahunt,
those willing to follow, id. Ep. 107, 11.—
(δ).
One who consents:
tutiusque rati volentibus quam coactis imperitare,
to rule men with their consent, Sall. J. 102, 6:
quippe rempublicam si a volentibus nequeat ab invitis jus expetituram,
peaceably if they could, forcibly if they must, Liv. 3, 40, 4:
si quis aliam rem pro alia volenti solverit,
if one pays with the consent of the receiver, Dig. 46, 3, 46:
nulla injuria est quae in volentem fiat,
ib. 47, 10, 1, § 5.—
(ε).
One who does a thing voluntarily:
pecuniam etiam a volentibus acceperant,
the contributions of money were voluntary, Vell. 2, 62, 3:
parce, puer, stimulis... (solis equi) Sponte sua properant. Labor est inhibere volentis (i. e. properare),
Ov. M. 2, 128.—
(ζ).
Volens = bene volens: munificus nemo habebatur nisi pariter volens, unless he was just as kindly disposed, sc. as he was liberal, Sall. J. 103, 6.—Often referring to a previously mentioned noun:
hunc cape consiliis socium et conjunge volentem,
and unite with him, since he wishes it, Verg. A. 5, 712; so may be taken Ov. M. 2, 128 (v. e).—
b.
In the neutr. plur. (volentia) rare, always with dat., things pleasing, acceptable:
Pompeius multis suspitionibus volentia plebi facturus habebatur,
that he would do what pleased the common people, Sall. H. 4, 31 Dietsch:
haec atque talia plebi volentia fuere,
Tac. A. 15, 36 Draeg. ad loc. al.:
iique Muciano volentia rescripsere,
id. H. 3, 52.—Hence, adv.: vŏlenter, willingly, App. M. 6, p. 178, 4.
2.
vŏlo, āvi, ātum ( part. gen. plur. volantūm, Verg. A. 6, 728; Lucr. 2, 1083), 1, v. n. [Sanscr. val-, to turn one's self, etc.; cf.: vŏlucer, vēlox, and vol- in velivolus], to fly.
I.
Lit.: ex alto... laeva volavit avis, Enn. ap. Cic. Div. 1, 48, 107 (Ann. v. 95 Vahl.):
aves,
Lucr. 6, 742:
accipitres,
id. 4, 1010:
corvi,
id. 2, 822:
altam supra volat ardea nubem,
Verg. G. 1, 364:
volat ille per aëra magnum Remigio alarum,
id. A. 1, 300:
columbae venere volantes,
id. ib. 6, 191; Prop. 2, 30 (3, 28), 30; Juv. 8, 251:
apes,
Ov. A. A. 1, 96; cf. Plin. 10, 38, 54, § 112:
volasse eum (Antonium), non iter fecisse diceres,
Cic. Phil. 10, 5, 11.—Prov.:
sine pennis volare haud facile est,
Plaut. Poen. 4, 2, 49.—
2.
P. a. as subst.: vŏlantes, ĭum, comm., the birds ( poet.), Lucr. 2, 1083; Verg. A. 6, 239; 6, 728.—
II.
Transf., to fly, i. e. to move swiftly like one flying, to fleet, speed, hasten along:
i sane... vola curriculo,
Plaut. Pers. 2, 2, 17; cf.:
per summa levis volat aequora curru,
Verg. A. 5, 819:
medios volat ecce per hostes Vectus equo spumante Saces,
id. ib. 12, 650:
illa (Argo) volat,
Ov. H. 6, 66:
currus,
Verg. G. 3, 181:
axis,
id. ib. 3, 107:
nubes,
Lucr. 5, 254:
fulmina,
id. 2, 213:
tempestates,
id. 6, 612:
telum,
id. 1, 971; cf. Sall. J. 60, 2; Verg. A. 9, 698; Liv. 26, 44, 7 al.:
litterae Capuam ad Pompeium volare dicebantur,
Cic. Att. 2, 19, 3:
volat aetas,
id. Tusc. 1, 31, 76:
hora,
Sen. Hippol. 1141:
fama,
Verg. A. 3, 121:
et semel emissum volat irrevocabile verbum,
Hor. Ep. 1, 18, 71.— Poet., with inf.:
ast Erebi virgo ditem volat aethere Memphim Praecipere et Phariā venientem pellere terrā,
Val. Fl. 4, 407.
3.
vŏlo, ōnis, m. [1. volo], a volunteer, first applied to the slaves who, after the battle at Cannæ, were enrolled upon their own expressed desire to serve (cf. Liv. 22, 57, 11; Val. Max. 7, 6, 1):
volones dicti sunt milites, qui post Cannensem cladem usque ad octo milia, cum essent servi, voluntarie se ad militiam obtulere,
Paul. Diac. p. 370:
volones, quia sponte hoc voluerunt, appellati,
Macr. S. 1, 11, 30:
vetus miles tironi, liber voloni sese exaequari sineret,
Liv. 23, 35, 6; 23, 32, 1; Capitol. Anton. Phil. 21, 6; Macr. S. 1, 11, 30.

Lewis & Short latin dictionary > volo

См. также в других словарях:

double negative — 1. • He never did no harm to no one The Archers (radio broadcast), 1987. This, and other double negative constructions, can easily be found in all varieties of English used throughout the world. It is commonly associated with poorly educated East … Modern English usage
Double negative — This article is about the linguistic construct. For other uses, see Double Negative (disambiguation). A double negative occurs when two forms of negation are used in the same sentence. Multiple negation is the more general term referring to the… … Wikipedia
English modal auxiliary verb — In the English language, a modal auxiliary verb is an auxiliary verb (or helping verb ) that can modify the grammatical mood (or mode ) of a verb. The key way to identify a modal auxiliary is by its defectiveness; the modal auxiliaries do not… … Wikipedia
nevermind — | ̷ ̷ ̷ ̷| ̷ ̷ noun Etymology: from the phrase never mind : a serious affair : matter of concern : strict attention used in negative constructions that s no nevermind of theirs not paying nobody no nevermind Stetson Kennedy * * * /nev euhr muynd … Useful english dictionary
bear — vb 1 *carry, convey, transport, transmit Analogous words: *move, remove, shift, transfer: hold, *contain 2 Bear, produce, yield, turn out are comparable when they mean to bring forth as products. Bear usually implies a giving birth to offspring… … New Dictionary of Synonyms
dare — verb. 1. Dare is an example of a so called semi modal auxiliary verb, because, like the modal verbs can, may, should, etc., it is used in certain special ways, but unlike these fully modal verbs it can also behave like an ordinary verb. Its… … Modern English usage
as — 1. problems with as…as… In this common construction, the first as is an adverb, and the second is either a preposition or a conjunction. a) When no verb follows, e.g. as good as we / as good as us, there is no problem with nouns after as because… … Modern English usage
Occidentalism — The term Occidentalism is used in one of two main ways: a) stereotyped and sometimes dehumanizing views on the Western world, including Europe and the English speaking world; and b), ideologies or visions of the West developed in either the West… … Wikipedia
as — as1 /az/; unstressed /euhz/, adv. 1. to the same degree, amount, or extent; similarly; equally: I don t think it s as hot and humid today as it was yesterday. 2. for example; for instance: Some flowers, as the rose, require special care. 3.… … Universalium
nevermind — /nev euhr muynd , nev euhr muynd /, n. Older Use. 1. attention; heed; notice (usually used in negative constructions): Pay him no nevermind. 2. business; affair; responsibility (usually used in negative constructions): It s no nevermind of yours … Universalium
till — till1 /til/, prep. 1. up to the time of; until: to fight till death. 2. before (used in negative constructions): He did not come till today. 3. near or at a specified time: till evening. 4. Chiefly Midland, Southern, and Western U.S. before; to:… … Universalium

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: со всех языков на английский

in+negative+constructions

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: со всех языков на английский

in+negative+constructions

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка: